Chevrolet 2009 Silverado manuel d'utilisation
- Voir en ligne ou télécharger le manuel d’utilisation
- 598 pages
- 3.25 mb
Aller à la page of
Les manuels d’utilisation similaires
-
Automobile
Chevrolet 2002 Chevy Cavalier
360 pages 2.51 mb -
Automobile
Chevrolet 2006
536 pages 3.15 mb -
Automobile
Chevrolet 2000
430 pages 2.99 mb -
Automobile
Chevrolet 2007 MALIBU
514 pages 2.88 mb -
Automobile
Chevrolet 2007 Express 2007 Express
452 pages 1.59 mb -
Automobile
Chevrolet Aveo 2007
436 pages 2.74 mb -
Automobile
Chevrolet Chevy Impala SS LSD
33 pages 2.64 mb -
Automobile
Chevrolet 2004
20 pages 0.21 mb
Un bon manuel d’utilisation
Les règles imposent au revendeur l'obligation de fournir à l'acheteur, avec des marchandises, le manuel d’utilisation Chevrolet 2009 Silverado. Le manque du manuel d’utilisation ou les informations incorrectes fournies au consommateur sont à la base d'une plainte pour non-conformité du dispositif avec le contrat. Conformément à la loi, l’inclusion du manuel d’utilisation sous une forme autre que le papier est autorisée, ce qui est souvent utilisé récemment, en incluant la forme graphique ou électronique du manuel Chevrolet 2009 Silverado ou les vidéos d'instruction pour les utilisateurs. La condition est son caractère lisible et compréhensible.
Qu'est ce que le manuel d’utilisation?
Le mot vient du latin "Instructio", à savoir organiser. Ainsi, le manuel d’utilisation Chevrolet 2009 Silverado décrit les étapes de la procédure. Le but du manuel d’utilisation est d’instruire, de faciliter le démarrage, l'utilisation de l'équipement ou l'exécution des actions spécifiques. Le manuel d’utilisation est une collection d'informations sur l'objet/service, une indice.
Malheureusement, peu d'utilisateurs prennent le temps de lire le manuel d’utilisation, et un bon manuel permet non seulement d’apprendre à connaître un certain nombre de fonctionnalités supplémentaires du dispositif acheté, mais aussi éviter la majorité des défaillances.
Donc, ce qui devrait contenir le manuel parfait?
Tout d'abord, le manuel d’utilisation Chevrolet 2009 Silverado devrait contenir:
- informations sur les caractéristiques techniques du dispositif Chevrolet 2009 Silverado
- nom du fabricant et année de fabrication Chevrolet 2009 Silverado
- instructions d'utilisation, de réglage et d’entretien de l'équipement Chevrolet 2009 Silverado
- signes de sécurité et attestations confirmant la conformité avec les normes pertinentes
Pourquoi nous ne lisons pas les manuels d’utilisation?
Habituellement, cela est dû au manque de temps et de certitude quant à la fonctionnalité spécifique de l'équipement acheté. Malheureusement, la connexion et le démarrage Chevrolet 2009 Silverado ne suffisent pas. Le manuel d’utilisation contient un certain nombre de lignes directrices concernant les fonctionnalités spécifiques, la sécurité, les méthodes d'entretien (même les moyens qui doivent être utilisés), les défauts possibles Chevrolet 2009 Silverado et les moyens de résoudre des problèmes communs lors de l'utilisation. Enfin, le manuel contient les coordonnées du service Chevrolet en l'absence de l'efficacité des solutions proposées. Actuellement, les manuels d’utilisation sous la forme d'animations intéressantes et de vidéos pédagogiques qui sont meilleurs que la brochure, sont très populaires. Ce type de manuel permet à l'utilisateur de voir toute la vidéo d'instruction sans sauter les spécifications et les descriptions techniques compliquées Chevrolet 2009 Silverado, comme c’est le cas pour la version papier.
Pourquoi lire le manuel d’utilisation?
Tout d'abord, il contient la réponse sur la structure, les possibilités du dispositif Chevrolet 2009 Silverado, l'utilisation de divers accessoires et une gamme d'informations pour profiter pleinement de toutes les fonctionnalités et commodités.
Après un achat réussi de l’équipement/dispositif, prenez un moment pour vous familiariser avec toutes les parties du manuel d'utilisation Chevrolet 2009 Silverado. À l'heure actuelle, ils sont soigneusement préparés et traduits pour qu'ils soient non seulement compréhensibles pour les utilisateurs, mais pour qu’ils remplissent leur fonction de base de l'information et d’aide.
Table des matières du manuel d’utilisation
-
Page 1
Seats and Restraint System ............................. 1 - 1 Head Restraints ......................................... 1 - 3 Front Seats ............................................... 1 - 4 Rear Seats .............................................. 1-14 Safety Belts ............................................. 1-16 Child Restraints ....................................... 1-38 Airbag System ......................................... 1-73 Restraint System Check ............................ 1-92 Features and Controls ..................................... 2 - 1 Keys ........................................................ 2 - 3 Doors and Locks ....................................... 2 - 9 Wind[...]
-
Page 2
Tires ...................................................... 5-64 Appearance Care ................................... 5-113 Vehicle Identification ............................... 5-121 Electrical System .................................... 5-121 Capacities and Specifications ................... 5-129 Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6 - 1 Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6 - 2 Customer Assistance Information .................... 7 - 1 Customer Assistance and Information ........... 7 - 2 Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-14 Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ........... 7-16 Index ..........................................[...]
-
Page 3
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem, and the names SILVERADO and Z71 are registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation. This manual includes the latest information at the time it was printed. GM reserves the right to make changes after that time without further notice. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of Canada Limited” for Chevrolet Motor Division wherever it appears in this manual. This manual describes features that may or may not be on your specific vehicle. Read this manual from beginning to end to learn about the vehicle’s features and controls. Pictures, symbols, and words work together to explain vehic[...]
-
Page 4
Index To quickly locate information about the vehicle, use the index in the back of the manual. It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the page number where it can be found. Safety Warnings and Symbols A circle with a slash through it is a safety symbol which means “Do Not,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not let this happen.” A box with the word CAUTION is used to tell about things that could hurt you or others if you were to ignore the warning. { CAUTION: These mean there is something that could hurt you or other people. Cautions tell what the hazard is and what to do to avoid or reduce the hazard. Read these cautions. A notice tells about something that can damage t[...]
-
Page 5
Vehicle Symbol Chart Here are some additional symbols that may be found on the vehicle and what they mean. For more information on the symbol, refer to the index. 0 : Adjustable Pedals 9 : Airbag Readiness Light # : Air Conditioning ! : Antilock Brake System (ABS) g : Audio Steering Wheel Controls or OnStar ® $ : Brake System Warning Light " : Charging System I : Cruise Control B : Engine Coolant Temperature O : Exterior Lamps # : Fog Lamps . : Fuel Gage + : Fuses i : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer j : LATCH System Child Restraints * : Malfunction Indicator Lamp : : Oil Pressure g : Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors } : Power / : Remote Vehicle Start > : Safety Belt Reminders 7 : Tire [...]
-
Page 6
✍ NOTES vi[...]
-
Page 7
Head Restraints .............................................. .1-3 Front Seats ..................................................... .1-4 Manual Seats ............................................... .1-4 Power Seats ................................................. .1-5 Manual Lumbar ............................................. .1-6 P o w e r L u m b a r .............................................. .1-7 Heated Seats ................................................ .1-8 Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals ................... .1-8 Reclining Seatbacks ..................................... .1-10 Seatback Latches ........................................ .1-13 Center Seat ........................[...]
-
Page 8
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .... .1-80 Airbag Off Switch ......................................... .1-81 Passenger Sensing System ........................... .1-84 Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... .1-90 Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ................................................... .1-90 Restraint System Check ................................. .1-92 Checking the Restraint Systems ..................... .1-92 Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash ..................................................... .1-93 Section 1 Seats and Restraint System 1-2[...]
-
Page 9
Head Restraints The front seats have adjustable head restraints in the outboard seating positions. { CAUTION: With head restraints that are not installed and adjusted properly, there is a greater chance that occupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do not drive until the head restraints for all occupants are installed and adjusted properly. Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint is at the same height as the top of the occupant’s head. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash. 1-3[...]
-
Page 10
Pull the head restraint up to raise it. To lower the head restraint, press the button, located on the top of the seatback, and push the restraint down. Push down on the head restraint after the button is released to make sure that it is locked in place. The head restraints are not designed to be removed. The rear seat has head rests that can be adjusted up and down. Front Seats Manual Seats { CAUTION: You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is moving. The sudden movement could startle and confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when the vehicle is not moving. 1-4[...]
-
Page 11
If the vehicle has a manual seat, it can be moved forward or rearward. 1. Lift the bar to unlock the seat. 2. Slide the seat to the desired position and release the bar. Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat is locked in place. Power Seats On a vehicle with power seats, the controls used to operate them are located on the outboard side of the seats. Driver’s Seat with Power Seat Control, Power Recline, and Power Lumbar shown 1-5[...]
-
Page 12
Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the control forward or rearward. Your vehicle may have additional features to adjust your vehicle’s power seat: • Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by moving the front of the control up or down. • Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion by moving the rear of the control up or down. • Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the entire control up or down. On seats with power reclining seatbacks, the control is located behind the power seat control on the outboard side of the seats. See “Power Reclining Seatbacks” under Reclining Seatbacks on page 1-10 . A vehicle with a memory function allows seat settings to be[...]
-
Page 13
Power Lumbar On seats with power lumbar, the controls used to operate this feature are located on the outboard side of the seats. • To increase lumbar support, press and hold the front of the control. • To decrease lumbar support, press and hold the rear of the control. The vehicle may have additional features to adjust your vehicle’s power seat: • To raise the height of the lumbar support, press and hold the top of the control. • To lower the height of the lumbar support, press and hold the bottom of the control. Release the control when the lower seatback reaches the desired level of lumbar support. Your vehicle may have a memory function which allows seat settings to be saved an[...]
-
Page 14
Heated Seats On vehicles with heated front seats, the controls are located on the driver and passenger doors. I (Heated Seatback): Press to turn on the heated seatback. J (Heated Seat and Seatback): Press to turn on the heated seat and seatback. The light on the button will come on to indicate that the feature is working. Press the button to cycle through the temperature settings of high, medium, and low and to turn the heat to the seat off. Indicator lights will show the level of heat selected: three for high, two for medium, and one for low. The heated seats will be canceled 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off. To use the heated seat feature after restarting the vehicle, press the [...]
-
Page 15
To save seating positions in memory: 1. Adjust the driver’s seat, including the seatback recliner and lumbar, both outside mirrors, and the throttle and brake pedals to a comfortable position. See Outside Power Mirrors on page 2-59 and Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal on page 2-26 for more information. Not all mirrors, adjustable throttles and brake pedals, or power lumbar will have the ability to save and recall their positions. 2. Press and hold button 1 until two beeps sound to indicate that the position has been stored. A second seating, lumbar, mirror, and throttle and brake pedal position can be programmed by repeating the above steps and pressing button 2. To recall the memory po[...]
-
Page 16
Easy Exit Seat The control for this feature is located on the driver’s door panel between buttons 1 and 2. With the vehicle in PARK (P), the driver’s seat exit position can be recalled by pressing the exit button. You will hear a single beep, and the driver’s seat will move back. If the easy exit seat feature is programmed in the Driver Information Center (DIC), automatic seat movement will occur when the key is removed from the ignition. See “EASY EXIT SEAT” under DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-76 for more information. The memory seat and easy exit features can also be programmed using the DIC. For programming information, see DIC Vehicle Customization (Wit[...]
-
Page 17
{ CAUTION: Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle up, your safety belts cannot do their job when you are reclined like this. The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a crash, you could go into it, receiving neck or other injuries. The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash the belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries. For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly. 1-11[...]
-
Page 18
Manual Reclining Seatbacks On seats with manual reclining seatbacks, the lever used to operate them is located on the outboard side of the seat(s). To recline the seatback: 1. Lift the recline lever. 2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then release the lever to lock the seatback in place. 3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked. To return the seatback to an upright position, do the following: 1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the seatback and the seatback will return to the upright position. 2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked. 1-12[...]
-
Page 19
Power Reclining Seatbacks If the seats have power reclining seatbacks, the control used to recline them is located on the outboard side of the seat behind the power seat control. • To recline the seatback, tilt the top of the control rearward. • To bring the seatback forward, tilt the top of the control forward. Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving. Seatback Latches The front seatbacks tilt forward to allow access to the rear of the cab. To tilt the seatback forward, lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat cushion. { CAUTION: If either seatback is not locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sittin[...]
-
Page 20
Rear Seats Rear Seat Operation (Extended Cab Full Bench) Folding the Rear Seat To fold the seat up, do the following: Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat. 1. Pull up on the front of the seat cushion while pulling down on the release strap, located under the seat cushion. 2. Pull the seat cushion up until it latches with the seatback. 3. After latching the seat cushion up, pull forward on it to make sure it is locked. To fold the seat down, do the following: 1. Push the seat cushion rearward while pulling the[...]
-
Page 21
Rear Seat Operation (All Split Bench and Hybrid Full Bench) Folding Rear Seat On a vehicle with a second row 60/40 split seat either side of the rear seat may be folded for added cargo space. Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat. Make sure that nothing is on the seat. To fold the seat, slowly pull the seat cushion up. To return the seat to the normal seating position, slowly pull the seat cushion down. { CAUTION: A safety belt that is improperly routed, not properly attached, or twisted will not provide the p[...]
-
Page 22
Safety Belts Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts properly. It also tells you some things you should not do with safety belts. { CAUTION: Do not let anyone ride where a safety belt cannot be worn properly. In a crash, if you or your passenger(s) are not wearing safety belts, the injuries can be much worse. You can hit things inside the vehicle harder or be ejected from the vehicle. You and your passenger(s) can be seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you might not be, if you are buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt, and check that your passenger(s) are restrained properly too. { CAUTION: People riding on the tailgate ([...]
-
Page 23
Your vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle your safety belts. See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-36 . In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law requires wearing safety belts. Here is why: You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one. A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so serious that even buckled up, a person would not survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt or killed. After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up do[...]
-
Page 24
Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider does not stop. 1-18[...]
-
Page 25
The person keeps going until stopped by something. In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield... or the instrument panel... 1-19[...]
-
Page 26
or the safety belts! With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does. You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance, and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why safety belts make such good sense. Questions and Answers About Safety Belts Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I am wearing a safety belt? A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety belt or not. But your chance of being conscious during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if you are belted. And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you are upside down. Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to wear safety belts? A: Airbags are supplemen[...]
-
Page 27
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from home, why should I wear safety belts? A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a crash — even one that is not your fault — you and your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a good driver does not protect you from things beyond your control, such as bad drivers. Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of home. And the greatest number of serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph (65 km/h). Safety belts are for everyone. How to Wear Safety Belts Properly This section is only for people of adult size. Be aware that there are special things to know about safety belts and children. And there are different ru[...]
-
Page 28
Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones and you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash. 1-22[...]
-
Page 29
Q: What is wrong with this? A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as much protection this way. { CAUTION: You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too much, which could increase injury. The shoulder belt should fit snugly against your body. 1-23[...]
-
Page 30
Q: What is wrong with this? A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as much protection this way. { CAUTION: You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too loose. In a crash, you could slide under the lap belt and apply force on your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The lap belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. 1-24[...]
-
Page 31
Q: What is wrong with this? A: The belt is buckled in the wrong buckle. { CAUTION: You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not on the pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you. 1-25[...]
-
Page 32
Q: What is wrong with this? A: The belt is over an armrest. { CAUTION: You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over an armrest like this. The belt would be much too high. In a crash, you can slide under the belt. The belt force would then be applied on the abdomen, not on the pelvic bones, and that could cause serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt goes under the armrests. 1-26[...]
-
Page 33
Q: What is wrong with this? A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should be worn over the shoulder at all times. { CAUTION: You can be seriously injured if you wear the shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your body would move too far forward, which would increase the chance of head and neck injury. Also, the belt would apply too much force to the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder bones. You could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. 1-27[...]
-
Page 34
Q: What is wrong with this? A: The belt is behind the body. { CAUTION: You can be seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you would not be restrained by the shoulder belt. Your body could move too far forward increasing the chance of head and neck injury. You might also slide under the lap belt. The belt force would then be applied right on the abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. 1-28[...]
-
Page 35
Q: What is wrong with this? A: The belt is twisted across the body. { CAUTION: You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a crash, you would not have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make it straight so it can work properly, or ask your dealer/retailer to fix it. 1-29[...]
-
Page 36
Lap-Shoulder Belt If your vehicle is a regular cab, then all seating positions in the vehicle have a lap-shoulder belt. If your vehicle is a crew or extended cab, then all seating positions in the vehicle have a lap-shoulder belt except for the center front passenger position (if equipped), which has a lap belt. See Lap Belt (Crew and Extended Cab) on page 1-36 for more information. The following instructions explain how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly. 1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the Index. 2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. Do not let it get twisted. The lap-shoulder belt may lock if yo[...]
-
Page 37
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt Extender on page 1-37 . If the latch plate will not go fully into the buckle, check if the correct buckle is being used. Position the release button on the buckle so that the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary. 4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster, move it to the height that is right for you. See “Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later in this section. 5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the shoulder belt. It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety belt through the latch plate to fully[...]
-
Page 38
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle. The belt should return to its stowed position. Before a door is closed, be sure the safety belt is out of the way. If a door is slammed against a safety belt, damage can occur to both the safety belt and the vehicle. Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster The vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the driver and right front passenger. Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt is centered on the shoulder. The belt should be away from the face and neck, but not falling off the shoulder. Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. To move the adjuster down for the regu[...]
-
Page 39
On the extended cab, push down on the release button (A) and move the height adjuster to the desired position. You can move the adjuster up just by pushing up on the shoulder belt guide. After you move the adjuster to where you want it, try to move it down, without squeezing the buttons for the regular and crew cabs, or without pushing the release button for extended cabs, to make sure it has locked into position. Safety Belt Pretensioners This vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for front outboard occupants. Although the safety belt pretensioners cannot be seen, they are part of the safety belt assembly. They can help tighten the safety belts during the early stages of a moderate to sever[...]
-
Page 40
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown booster seats and for some adults. When installed on a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the belt away from the neck and head. There is one guide for each outboard passenger position in the rear seat. Here is how to install a comfort guide to the shoulder belt: 1. Remove the guide from its storage clip on the interior body. 2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide. 3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat. The elastic cord must be under the belt and the guide on top. 1-34[...]
-
Page 41
{ CAUTION: A safety belt that is not properly worn may not provide the protection needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. 4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as described previously in this section. Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder. To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the belt edges together so that the safety belt can be removed from the guide. Slide the guide onto the storage clip. 1-35[...]
-
Page 42
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts. A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy. The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly. Lap Belt (Crew and Extended Cab) This section is only for the lap belt. To learn how to wear a lap[...]
-
Page 43
To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown until the belt is snug. If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt Extender on page 1-37 . Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if necessary. Safety Belt Extender If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you should use it. But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer/ retailer will order you an extender. When you go in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender h[...]
-
Page 44
Child Restraints Older Children Older children who have outgrown booster seats should wear the vehicle’s safety belts. The manufacturer’s instructions that come with the booster seat state the weight and height limitations for that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder belt until the child passes the below fit test: • Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to the booster seat. • Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try using the rear safety belt comfort guide. See “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 1-30 for more in[...]
-
Page 45
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts? A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the top of the thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash. It should never be worn over the abdomen, which could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash. Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 1-30 . According to accident statistics, children and infants are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint system or infant restraint s[...]
-
Page 46
{ CAUTION: Never do this. Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with the shoulder belt behind their back. A child can be seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, the child would not be restrained by the shoulder belt. The child could move too far forward increasing the chance of head and neck injury. The child might also slide under the lap belt. The belt force would then be applied right on the abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. 1-40[...]
-
Page 47
Infants and Young Children Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes infants and all other children. Neither the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact, the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle. { CAUTION: Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and the safety belt continues to tighten. Never leave children unattended in a vehicle and never allow children to play with the safety belts. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer protection for adults a[...]
-
Page 48
{ CAUTION: Never do this. Never hold an infant or a child while riding in a vehicle. Due to crash forces, an infant or a child will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it during a crash. For example, in a crash at only 40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb) infant will suddenly become a 110 kg (240 lb) force on a person’s arms. An infant should be secured in an appropriate restraint. 1-42[...]
-
Page 49
{ CAUTION: Never do this. Children who are up against, or very close to, any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the right front seat. Secure a rear-facing child restraint in a rear seat. It is also better to secure a forward-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If you must secure a forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat, always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go. 1-43[...]
-
Page 50
Q: What are the different types of add-on child restraints? A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types. Selection of a particular restraint should take into consideration not only the child’s weight, height, and age but also whether or not the restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will be used. For most basic types of child restraints, there are many different models available. When purchasing a child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards. The restraint manufacturer’s ins[...]
-
Page 51
{ CAUTION: A young child’s hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s regular safety belt may not remain low on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt would apply force on a body area that is unprotected by any bony structure. This alone could cause serious or fatal injuries. To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash, young children should always be secured in appropriate child restraints. Child Restraint Systems A rear-facing infant seat (A) provides restraint with the seating surface against the back of the infant. The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash, acts to keep the i[...]
-
Page 52
A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. A booster seat can also help a child to see out the window. Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in the Vehicle { CAUTION: A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle. Secure the child restraint properly in the vehicle using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH system, following the instructions that came with that child restraint and the instructions in this manual. 1-46[...]
-
Page 53
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-49 for more information. A child can be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle. When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the instructions that come with the restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this manual. The child restraint instructions are important, so if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy [...]
-
Page 54
Where to Put the Restraint According to accident statistics, children and infants are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint system or infant restraint system secured in a rear seating position. We recommend that children and child restraints be secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children, who are large enough, using safety belts. A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys. { CAUTION: A child in a rear[...]
-
Page 55
{ CAUTION: A child in a child restraint in the center front seat can be badly injured or killed by the frontal airbags if they inflate. Never secure a child restraint in the center front seat. It is always better to secure a child restraint in a rear seat. Do not use child restraints in the center front seat position. When securing a child restraint in a rear seating position, study the instructions that came with your child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat that will accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, a rear-facing child restraint should not be installed in the vehicle, even if the airbag is off. Wherever a child res[...]
-
Page 56
Lower Anchors Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle. There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating position that will accommodate a child restraint with lower attachments (B). Top Tether Anchor A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation of the child restraint during driving or in a crash. Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B) to secure the top tether to the anchor. [...]
-
Page 57
Some child restraints that have a top tether are designed for use with or without the top tether being attached. Others require the top tether always to be attached. In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be attached. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for your child restraint. If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one can be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit is available. Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor Locations i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating positions with top tether anchors. Do not install a child restraint in the center front[...]
-
Page 58
i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating positions with top tether anchors. j (Lower Anchor): Seating positions with two lower anchors. For crew and extended cab models, the rear outboard seating positions have exposed metal lower anchors located in the crease between the seatback and the seat cushion. For regular cab models, there is an anchor symbol on the covers to assist you in locating the top tether anchors. Do not install a child restraint in the center seat position. See Securing a Child Restraint in the Center Front Seat Position on page 1-61 for more information. For regular cab models, the top tether anchors are located under covers on the back panel behind the passenger seat. Remove the tr[...]
-
Page 59
For crew and extended cab models, the top tether anchors are the loops located near the top of the seatback for each rear seating position. These loops will be used to route the top tether through, as well as, to secure the top tether in the vehicle. Be sure to use an anchor (loop) located on the same side of the vehicle as the seating position where the child restraint will be placed. Be sure to read the instructions following to properly install a child restraint using these loops. Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that t[...]
-
Page 60
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System { CAUTION: If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached to anchors, the child restraint will not be able to protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child could be seriously injured or killed. Install a LATCH-type child restraint properly using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint, following the instructions that came with the child restraint and the instructions in this manual. { CAUTION: Do not attach more than one child restraint to a single anchor, except for the center top tether anchors in the crew and extended cabs. Attaching CAUTION: (Continued) CAUTION: (Continued) more than one child[...]
-
Page 61
Notice: Do not let the LATCH attachments rub against the vehicle’s safety belts. This may damage these parts. If necessary, move buckled safety belts to avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments. Do not fold the empty rear seat with a safety belt buckled. This could damage the safety belt or the seat. Unbuckle and return the safety belt to its stowed position, before folding the seat. Regular Cab Models 1. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor, if your vehicle has one. Refer to the child restraint instructions and the following steps: 1.1. Pull the passenger seatback forward by pulling the reclin[...]
-
Page 62
2. See Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position (With Airbag Off Switch) on page 1-62 or Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position (With Passenger Sensing System) on page 1-66 or Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position (Heavy Duty Crew Cab Only) on page 1-70 for instructions on installing the child restraint using the safety belts. 3. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. Crew and Extended Cab Models 1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have lower attachments or the desired seating position does not have lower anchors, secure the c[...]
-
Page 63
2.1. When using a child restraint with a top tether in the rear driver side position: A. Raise the headrest or head restraint. B. Route the top tether (B) between the headrest or head restraint posts, through the loop (A), behind the inboard headrest or head restraint post, and under the center shoulder belt (C). C. Attach the top tether (B) to the top tether anchor (loop) (D) at the center rear seating position. 2.2. When using a child restraint with a top tether in the rear center position: A. Route the top tether (B) through the center loop (D), and behind the inboard passenger side headrest or head restraint post. B. Attach the top tether (B) to the top tether anchor (loop) at the rear p[...]
-
Page 64
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position When securing a child restraint in a rear seating position, study the instructions that came with the child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle. If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-49 for how and where to install the child restraint using LATCH. If a child restraint is secured in the vehicle using a safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-49 for top tether anchor locations. Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tet[...]
-
Page 65
For crew cab second row seatings positions, tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed. 3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Position the release button on the buckle so that the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary. 1-59[...]
-
Page 66
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock. 5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. 1-60[...]
-
Page 67
6. If the child restraint has a top tether, follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding the use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-49 for more information. 7. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and let it return to the stowed position. If the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it. Securing a Child Restraint in the Center Front Seat Position { CAUTION: A child in a child restraint in the center front seat can be badly injured or killed by the frontal airbags if they inflate. Never secure a ch[...]
-
Page 68
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position (With Airbag Of f Switch) This vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1-48 . There may be a switch in the glove box that you can use to turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag. See Airbag Off Switch on page 1-81 for more information, including important safety information. A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys. { CAUTION: A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if [...]
-
Page 69
{ CAUTION: If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and stays on, it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system. For example, the right front passenger airbag could inflate even though the airbag on-off switch is turned of f. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right away. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-37 for more information, including important safety information. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat that will accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, a rear-facing child restraint should not be installed in the vehicle, even if the airbag is off. If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Ch[...]
-
Page 70
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Position the release button so that the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary. 5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock. 1-64[...]
-
Page 71
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. 7. If your vehicle does not have a rear seat and your child restraint has a top tether, follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding the use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-49 . 8. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. To remove the child restraint, un[...]
-
Page 72
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position (With Passenger Sensing System) This vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1-48 . In addition, the vehicle may have a passenger sensing system which is designed to turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions. See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-84 and Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-40 for more information on this, including important safety information. A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so [...]
-
Page 73
If the vehicle does not have a rear seat that will accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, a rear-facing child restraint should not be installed in the vehicle, even if the airbag is off. If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-49 for how and where to install your child restraint using LATCH. If you secure a child restraint using a safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-49 for top tether anchor locations. Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions [...]
-
Page 74
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Position the release button so that the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary. 5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock. 1-68[...]
-
Page 75
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. 7. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat and the child restraint has a top tether, follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding the use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-49 for more information. 8. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. If the airbag i[...]
-
Page 76
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position (Heavy Duty Crew Cab Only) Your vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1-48 . A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the right front passenger seat. Here is why: { CAUTION: A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be v[...]
-
Page 77
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be attached. You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. 1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before securing the forward-facing child restraint. 2. Put the child restraint on the seat. 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how. 4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be ab[...]
-
Page 78
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock. 6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor. If you are using a forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. 1-72[...]
-
Page 79
7. If your child restraint has a top tether, follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding the use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-49 for more information. 8. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and let it return to the stowed position. If the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it. Airbag System The vehicle has the following airbags: • A frontal airbag for the driver. • A frontal airbag for the right front passenger. The vehicle may have the following airbags: • A roof-rail airbag for t[...]
-
Page 80
Here are the most important things to know about the airbag system: { CAUTION: You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if you are not wearing your safety belt — even if you have airbags. Airbags are designed to work with safety belts, but do not replace them. Also, airbags are not designed to deploy in every crash. In some crashes safety belts are your only restraint. See When Should an Airbag Inflate? on page 1-77 . Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are “supplemental restraints” to the safety belts. Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt properly — whether or n[...]
-
Page 81
{ CAUTION: Children who are up against, or very close to, any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer protection for adults and older children, but not for young children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed for them. Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide. Always secure children properly in your vehicle. To read how, see Older Children on page 1-38 or Infants and Young Children on page 1-41 . There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument panel cluster, which shows the airbag symbol. The system checks the airbag electrical sy[...]
-
Page 82
The right front passenger’s airbag is in the instrument panel on the passenger’s side. If your vehicle has roof-rail airbags for the driver, right front passenger, and second row outboard passengers, they are in the ceiling above the side windows. Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar 1-76[...]
-
Page 83
{ CAUTION: If something is between an occupant and an airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that person causing severe injury or even death. The path of an inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put anything between an occupant and an airbag, and do not attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other airbag covering. Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags by routing a rope or tie down through any door or window opening. If you do, the path of an inflating roof-rail airbag will be blocked. When Should an Airbag Inflate? Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe front[...]
-
Page 84
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds. For example: • If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits a moving object. • If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform. • If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall). • If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle goes straight into the object. Thresholds [...]
-
Page 85
Roof-rail airbags are not intended to inflate in rear impacts. Both roof-rail airbags will deploy when either side of the vehicle is struck, or if the sensing system predicts that the vehicle is about to roll over, or in a severe frontal impact. In any particular crash, no one can say whether an airbag should have inflated simply because of the damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by what the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how quickly the vehicle slows down. For roof-rail airbags, deployment is determined by the location and severity of the side impact. In a rollover event, roof-rail airbag deployment is det[...]
-
Page 86
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? After the frontal airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that some people may not even realize an airbag inflated. Roof-rail airbags may still be at least partially inflated for some time after they deploy. Some components of the airbag module may be hot for several minutes. For location of the airbag modules, see What Makes an Airbag Inflate? on page 1-79 . The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able to steer[...]
-
Page 87
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag, windshields are broken by vehicle deformation. Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the right front passenger airbag. • Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for the airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag system will not be there to help protect you in another crash. A new system will include airbag modules and possibly other parts. The service manual for the vehicle covers the need to replace other parts. • The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic module which records information after a crash. See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy on page 7[...]
-
Page 88
This switch should only be turned to the off position if the person in the right front passenger position is a member of a passenger risk group identified by the national government as follows: Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old) must ride in the front seat because: • My vehicle has no rear seat; • My vehicle has a rear seat too small to accommodate a rear-facing infant seat; or • The infant has a medical condition which, according to the infant’s physician, makes it necessary for the infant to ride in the front seat so that the driver can constantly monitor the child’s condition. Child age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 must ride in the front seat because: • My vehicle has n[...]
-
Page 89
To turn off the right front passenger airbag, insert the ignition key into the switch, push in, and move the switch to the off position. The word OFF or the off symbol will come on in the passenger airbag status indicator located in the overhead console to let you know that the right front passenger airbag is off, after the system check is completed. The airbag off light will come on and stay on to let you know that the right front passenger’s airbag is off. See Airbag Off Light on page 3-38 . { CAUTION: If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and stays on, it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system. For example, the right front passenger airbag could inflate even tho[...]
-
Page 90
To turn the right front passenger airbag on again, insert the ignition key into the switch, push in, and move the switch to the on position. The right front passenger frontal airbag is now enabled (may inflate). See Airbag Off Light on page 3-38 for more information. Passenger Sensing System If the vehicle has one of the indicators pictured in the following illustrations, then the vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the right front passenger position, unless there is an airbag off switch located in the glove box. If there is an airbag off switch, the vehicle does not have a passenger sensing system. See Airbag Off Switch on page 1-81 for more information. The passenger airbag status [...]
-
Page 91
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions. The driver airbag and the roof-rail airbags (if equipped) are not affected by the passenger sensing system. The passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of the right front passenger seat and safety belt. The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a properly-seated occupant and determine if the right front passenger frontal airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or not. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly secured in a rear seat in the correct child restraint for their weight and size. We recommend that children be secured in a r[...]
-
Page 92
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag if: • The right front passenger seat is unoccupied. • The system determines an infant is present in a child restraint. • A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of the seat for a period of time. • Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag system or the passenger sensing system. When the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag, the off indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-40 . The passenger sensing system is designed to turn on (may inflate) the right [...]
-
Page 93
If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child Restraint If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator is lit: 1. Turn the vehicle off. 2. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle. 3. Remove any additional items from the seat such as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or seat massagers. 4. Reinstall the child restraint following the directions provided by the child restraint manufacturer and refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position With Passenger Sensing System in the Index. 5. If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, turn the vehicle off. Then slightly recline the vehicle seatback [...]
-
Page 94
If the Of f Indicator is Lit for an Adult-Size Occupant If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front passenger seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be because that person is not sitting properly in the seat. If this happens, use the following steps to allow the system to detect that person and enable the right front passenger frontal airbag: 1. Turn the vehicle off. 2. Remove any additional material from the seat, such as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or seat massagers. 3. Place the seatback in the fully upright position. 4. Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with legs comfortably extended. 5. Restart the vehicle and hav[...]
-
Page 95
Additional Factors Af fecting System Operation Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which helps the passenger sensing system maintain the passenger airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints” in the Index for additional information about the importance of proper restraint use. If the shoulder portion of the belt is pulled out all the way, the child restraint locking feature will be engaged. This may unintentionally cause the passenger sensing system to turn the airbag off for some adult size occupants. If this happens, let the belt go back all the way and start again. A thick layer of additional material, such[...]
-
Page 96
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle Airbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced. There are parts of the airbag system in several places around the vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the service manual have information about servicing the vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase a service manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7-15 . { CAUTION: For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off and the battery is disconnected, an airbag can still inflate during improper service. You can be injured if you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. They are probably part of the airbag system. Be sure to follow proper service procedure[...]
-
Page 97
Any object, such as an aftermarket seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device, installed under or on top of the seat fabric, could also interfere with the operation of the passenger sensing system. This could either prevent proper deployment of the passenger airbag(s) or prevent the passenger sensing system from properly turning off the passenger airbag(s). See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-84 . If you have any questions about this, you should contact Customer Assistance before you modify your vehicle. The phone numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2 . If y[...]
-
Page 98
Restraint System Check Checking the Restraint Systems Safety Belts Now and then, check that the safety belt reminder light, safety belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and anchorages are all working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job. See your dealer/retailer to have it repaired. Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away. Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working. See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-36 for more information. Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety B[...]
-
Page 99
Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash { CAUTION: A crash can damage the restraint systems in your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may not properly protect the person using it, resulting in serious injury or even death in a crash. To help make sure your restraint systems are working properly after a crash, have them inspected and any necessary replacements made as soon as possible. If the vehicle has been in a crash, do you need new safety belts or LATCH system (if equipped) parts? After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary. But the safety belt assemblies that were used during any crash may have been stressed or damaged. See your dealer/retailer to have the safety belt as[...]
-
Page 100
✍ NOTES 1-94[...]
-
Page 101
Keys .............................................................. .2-3 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ............... .2-4 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation .................................................. .2-4 Remote Vehicle Start ..................................... .2-7 Doors and Locks ............................................ .2-9 Door Locks ................................................... .2-9 Power Door Locks ......................................... .2-9 Delayed Locking ............................................ .2-9 Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. .2-10 Rear Door Security Locks ............................. .2-10 Lockout Protection ..........[...]
-
Page 102
Park Tilt Mirrors ........................................... .2-60 Outside Convex Mirror .................................. .2-61 Outside Heated Mirrors ................................. .2-61 Object Detection Systems .............................. .2-62 Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ........... .2-62 Rear Vision Camera (RVC) ........................... .2-65 OnStar ® System ............................................ .2-71 Universal Home Remote System ..................... .2-74 Universal Home Remote System Operation (With Three Round LED) ........................... .2-75 Storage Areas ............................................... .2-81 Glove Box ..............................[...]
-
Page 103
Keys { CAUTION: Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons, children or others could be badly injured or even killed. They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move. The windows will function with the keys in the ignition and children could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the path of a closing window. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle with children. The key is used for the ignition and all door locks. The key has a bar-coded key tag that the dealer/retailer or qualified locksmith can use to make new keys. Store this information in a safe place, not in the vehicle. See your dealer/retailer if a replacem[...]
-
Page 104
If you are locked out of the vehicle, call the Roadside Assistance Center. See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-7 . Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System If this vehicle has the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system, it operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause interference. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following tw[...]
-
Page 105
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): For vehicles with this feature, press / to start the engine from outside the vehicle using the RKE transmitter. See Remote Vehicle Start on page 2-7 for additional information. Q (Lock): Press to lock all the doors. If enabled through the Driver Information Center (DIC), the turn signal lamps flash once to indicate locking has occurred. If enabled through the DIC, the horn chirps when Q is pressed again within three seconds. See DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-76 for additional information. Pressing Q arms the content theft-deterrent system. See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-17 . K (Unlock): Press once to unlock only the driver door. If K[...]
-
Page 106
Programming Transmitters to the Vehicle Only RKE transmitters programmed to this vehicle will work. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased and programmed through your dealer/retailer. When the replacement transmitter is programmed to this vehicle, all remaining transmitters must also be reprogrammed. Any lost or stolen transmitters will no longer work once the new transmitter is programmed. Each vehicle can have up to eight transmitters programmed to it. See “Relearn Remote Key” under DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-53 or DIC Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on page 3-59 for instructions on how to match RKE transmitters to y[...]
-
Page 107
Remote Vehicle Start Your vehicle may have a remote starting feature. This feature allows you to start the engine from outside of the vehicle. It may also start up the vehicle’s heating or air conditioning systems and rear window defogger. Normal operation of the system will return after the key is turned to the ON/RUN position. If your vehicle has an automatic climate control system, the climate control system will default to a heating or cooling mode depending on the outside temperatures. If your vehicle does not have an automatic climate control system, the system will turn on at the setting the vehicle was set to when the vehicle was last turned off. During a remote start, if your vehi[...]
-
Page 108
3. If it is the first remote start since the vehicle has been driven, repeat these steps, while the engine is still running, to extend the engine running time by 10 minutes. Remote start can be extended one time. After entering the vehicle during a remote start, insert and turn the key to RUN to drive the vehicle. To manually shut off a remote start, do any of the following: • Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press the remote start button until the parking lamps turn off. • Turn on the hazard warning flashers. • Turn the ignition switch on and then off. The vehicle can be remote started two separate times between driving sequences. The engine will run for 10 minutes after e[...]
-
Page 109
Doors and Locks Door Locks { CAUTION: Unlocked doors can be dangerous. • Passengers, especially children, can easily open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle will not open it. The chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash is increased if the doors are not locked. So, all passengers should wear safety belts properly and the doors should be locked whenever the vehicle is driven. • Young children who get into unlocked vehicles may be unable to get out. A child can be overcome by extreme heat and can suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke. Always lock the vehicle whenever leaving it. • Outsiders can easily enter through[...]
-
Page 110
This feature will not operate if the key is in the ignition. You can program this feature using the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DELAY DOOR LOCK under DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-76 . Programmable Automatic Door Locks Vehicles with an automatic lock/unlock feature enable you to program the vehicle’s power door locks. You can program this feature through the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-76 for more information on DIC programming. Rear Door Security Locks Your vehicle has rear door security locks. These prevent passengers from opening the rear doors from the inside. The rear door security locks [...]
-
Page 111
When you want to open a rear door when the security lock is on, do the following: 1. Unlock the door by lifting the rear door manual lock, using the power door lock switch, or the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, if the vehicle has one. 2. Open the door from the outside. To cancel the rear door security lock, do the following: 1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside. 2. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it so the slot is in the vertical position. Lockout Protection This feature protects you from locking the key in the vehicle when the key is in the ignition and a front door is open. If the driver’s side power door lock switch is pressed when the driver’s [...]
-
Page 112
To open a rear access door from the inside, the front door must be opened first. Then, use the handle located on the inside of the rear access door to open. Crew Cabs If your vehicle is a crew cab, you can open your doors from the inside or outside. Your vehicle may also have a feature which prevents children from opening the rear doors. See Rear Door Security Locks on page 2-10 for more information. Tailgate { CAUTION: It is extremely dangerous to ride on the tailgate, even when the vehicle is operated at low speeds. People riding on the tailgate can easily lose their balance and fall in response to vehicle maneuvers. Falling from a moving vehicle may result in serious injuries or death. D[...]
-
Page 113
Tailgate Removal The tailgate can be removed to allow for different loading situations. Although the tailgate can be removed without assistance, you may want someone to assist you with the removal to avoid possible damage to the vehicle. On vehicles with a rear vision camera, it must be disconnected before removing the tailgate. See Rear Vision Camera (RVC) on page 2-65 for more information. To remove the tailgate, do the following: 1. Raise the tailgate slightly and release both retaining cable clips. To release the retaining cable clips, lift the cable so it points straight out. Lift the clip over the bolt, and push the cable forward then rotate down. 2. With the tailgate about halfway ope[...]
-
Page 114
Windows { CAUTION: Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous. They can be overcome by the extreme heat and suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows closed in warm or hot weather. 2-14[...]
-
Page 115
Manual Windows Turn the hand crank on each door to manually raise or lower the manual windows. Power Windows { CAUTION: Leaving children in a vehicle with the keys is dangerous for many reasons, children or others could be badly injured or even killed. They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move. The windows will function and they could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the path of a closing window. Do not leave keys in a vehicle with children. When there are children in the rear seat use the window lockout button to prevent unintentional operation of the windows. If your vehicle has power windows, the controls are located on each of the sid[...]
-
Page 116
Express Down Windows Vehicles with the express down feature allow the driver and front passenger windows to be lowered without holding the switch. Press down fully on the window switch, then release, to activate the express down mode. The express down mode can be canceled at any time by pulling up on the switch. To open the window partway, press the switch to the first depression position, until the window is at the desired position. Window Lockout o (Window Lockout): If your crew cab or extended cab vehicle has power windows, the driver’s door power window switch has a lockout feature. The lockout switch is located in front of the window switches. This feature prevents the rear windows f[...]
-
Page 117
Sun Visors Pull the sun visor down to block glare. Swing the sun visor to the side to cover the side window. The passenger’s side sun visor may have a vanity mirror. Theft-Deterrent Systems Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities. This vehicle has theft-deterrent features, however, they do not make it impossible to steal. Content Theft-Deterrent Your vehicle may have a content theft-deterrent alarm system. This is the security light. To arm the theft-deterrent system: 1. Open the door. 2. Lock the door with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. The security light should come on and flash. If the delayed locking feature is active, the alarm will not be activated unti[...]
-
Page 118
You should also remember that you can start your vehicle with the correct ignition key if the alarm has been set off. To avoid setting off the alarm by accident: • If you do not want to activate the theft-deterrent system, the vehicle should be locked with the door key after the doors are closed. • Always unlock a door with the RKE transmitter. Unlocking a door any other way will set off the alarm if the system has been armed. If you set off the alarm by accident, press unlock on the RKE transmitter or place the key in the ignition and turn it to START to turn it off. Testing the Alarm To test the alarm: 1. From inside the vehicle, lower the driver’s window and open the driver’s door[...]
-
Page 119
PASS-Key ® III+ Electronic Immobilizer The PASS-Key III+ system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause interference. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired[...]
-
Page 120
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time, you may also want to check the fuse, see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-122 . If the engine still does not start with the other key, your vehicle needs service. If your vehicle does start, the first key may be faulty. See your dealer/retailer who can service the PASS-Key ® III+ to have a new key made. In an emergency, contact Roadside Assistance. It is possible for the PASS-Key ® III+ decoder to learn the transponder value of a new or replacement key. Up to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle. The following procedure is for programming additional keys only. If all t[...]
-
Page 121
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle New Vehicle Break-In Notice: The vehicle does not need an elaborate break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if you follow these guidelines: • Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less for the first 500 miles (805 km). • Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to brake or slow the vehicle. • Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time the new brake linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with new linings can mean premature wear and earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline every time[...]
-
Page 122
The steering can bind with the wheels turned off center. If this happens, move the steering wheel from right to left while turning the key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this doesn’t work, then the vehicle needs service. Notice: Using a tool to force the key to turn in the ignition could cause damage to the switch or break the key. Use the correct key, make sure it is all the way in, and turn it only with your hand. If the key cannot be turned by hand, see your dealer/retailer. B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This position lets things like the radio and the windshield wipers operate while the engine is off. Use this position if the vehicle must be pushed or towed. C (ON/RUN): This position can be used to operate[...]
-
Page 123
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) The following vehicle accessories can be used for up to 10 minutes after the engine is turned off: • Audio System • Power Windows • OnStar ® System (if equipped) • Sunroof (if equipped) These features work when the key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. Once the key is turned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF, the windows and sunroof continue to work up to 10 minutes until any door is opened. The radio continues to work for up to 10 minutes or until the driver door is opened. Starting the Engine If the vehicle has the DURAMAX ® Diesel engine, see the DURAMAX ® Diesel manual for more information. If the vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode Hybrid manual f[...]
-
Page 124
Starting Procedure 1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your engine gets warm. Do not race the engine immediately after starting it. Operate the engine and transmission gently to allow the oil to warm up and lubricate all moving parts. The vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking System. This feature assists in starting the engine and protects components. If the ignition key is turned to the START position, and then released when the engine begins cranking, the engine will continue cranking for a few seconds or until the vehicle starts. If the engine does not start and the key [...]
-
Page 125
Fast Idle System Fast Idle System with Switch If the vehicle has this feature it is available only with cruise control. The manual fast idle switch is operated using the cruise control buttons located on the left hand side of the steering wheel. This system can be used to increase engine idle speed whenever the following conditions are met: • The park brake is set. • The brake pedal is not pressed. • The vehicle must not be moving and the accelerator must not be pressed. To control the fast idle: • To Enable the Fast idle, press and release the Cruise Control On/Off button and ensure that the LED is lit. • For the preset Fast Idle, press and release the cruise set switch. This will[...]
-
Page 126
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal On vehicles with this feature, you can change the position of the throttle and brake pedals. No adjustment to the pedals can be made when the vehicle is in R (Reverse) or while using the cruise control. The switch used to adjust the pedals is located on the instrument panel below the climate control system. Press the arrow at the bottom of the switch to move the pedals closer to your body. Press the arrow at the top of the switch to move the pedals away from your body. Before you start driving, fully press the brake pedal to confirm the adjustment is right for you. While driving, make only small adjustments. The vehicle may have a memory function which le[...]
-
Page 127
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater 1. Turn off the engine. 2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. The cord is located on the driver’s side of the engine compartment, near the power steering fluid reservoir. 3. Plug the cord into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet. { CAUTION: Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind of extension cord could overheat and cause a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong extension cord rated for at least 15 amps. 4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and stor[...]
-
Page 128
Automatic Transmission Operation If the vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode Hybrid manual for more information. Vehicles with an automatic transmission have an electronic shift position indicator within the instrument panel cluster. This display comes on when the ignition key is turned to the ON/RUN position. There are several different positions for the shift lever. See “Range Selection Mode” later in this section. P (Park): This position locks the rear wheels. It is the best position to use when starting the engine because the vehicle cannot move easily. When parked on a hill, especially when the vehicle has a heavy load, you might notice an increase in the effort to shift o[...]
-
Page 129
{ CAUTION: It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly level ground, always set the parking brake and move the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting Into Park on page 2-52 . If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 4-50 . { CAUTION: If you have Four-Wheel Drive, the vehicle will be free to roll — even if the shift lever is in P (Park) — i[...]
-
Page 130
N (Neutral): In this position, the engine does not connect with the wheels. To restart when you are already moving, use N (Neutral) only. Also, use N (Neutral) when the vehicle is being towed. { CAUTION: Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear while the engine is running at high speed. Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with the engine running at high speed may damage the transmission. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is not runni[...]
-
Page 131
The vehicle has a shift stabilization feature that adjusts the transmission shifting to the current driving conditions in order to reduce rapid upshifts and downshifts. This shift stabilization feature is designed to determine, before making an upshift, if the engine is able to maintain vehicle speed by analyzing things such as vehicle speed, throttle position, and vehicle load. If the shift stabilization feature determines that a current vehicle speed cannot be maintained, the transmission does not upshift and instead holds the current gear. In some cases, this could appear to be a delayed shift, however the transmission is operating normally. The transmission uses adaptive shift controls. [...]
-
Page 132
1 (First): For the Hydra-Matic ® 4-Speed transmission this position reduces vehicle speed even more than 2 (Second) without using the brakes. You can use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the shift lever is put in 1 (First) while the vehicle is moving forward, the transmission does not shift into first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough. For an Allison Transmission ® or Hydra-Matic ® 6-Speed transmission, this position reduces vehicle speed without using the brakes. You can use it for major/severe downgrades and off-road driving where the vehicle would otherwise accelerate due to steepness of grade. When you shift to 1 (First) it provides the lowest gear appro[...]
-
Page 133
To use this feature, do the following: 1. Move the shift lever to M (Manual Mode). 2. Press the plus/minus buttons, located on the steering column shift lever, to select the desired range of gears for current driving conditions. When M (Manual Mode) is selected a number displays next to the M, indicating the current gear. This number is the highest gear that can be used. However, the vehicle can automatically shift to lower gears as it adjusts to driving conditions. This means that all gears below that number are available. When 5 (Fifth) is selected, 1 (First) through 5 (Fifth) gears are automatically shifted by the vehicle, but 6 (Sixth) cannot be used until the plus/minus button located o[...]
-
Page 134
Tow/Haul Mode Vehicles with an automatic transmission have a tow/haul mode. The tow/haul mode adjusts the transmission shift pattern to reduce shift cycling, providing increased performance, vehicle control, and transmission cooling when towing or hauling heavy loads. The selector button is located on the end of the shift lever. Turn the tow/haul on and off by pressing the button. When the tow/haul is on, a light on the instrument panel cluster will come on. See Tow/Haul Mode Light on page 3-51 for more information. Also see Tow Haul Mode under Towing a Trailer on page 4-50 for more information. Tow/Haul Mode (Allison Transmission ® or Hydra-Matic ® 6-Speed Automatic Transmission) Vehicles[...]
-
Page 135
Turn the tow/haul mode on and off by pressing the button, located on the end of the shift lever. When the tow/haul is on, a light on the instrument panel cluster will come on. See Tow/Haul Mode Light on page 3-51 for more information. Also see “Tow Haul Mode” under Towing a Trailer on page 4-50 for more information. Grade Braking (Allison Transmission ® or Hydra-Matic ® 6-Speed Automatic Transmission) The Grade Braking shift modes can be activated by pressing the button on the end of the shift control lever. While in Range Selection Mode, Grade Braking is deactivated allowing the driver to select a desired range of gears. Grade Braking is only active while the Tow/Haul Mode is selected[...]
-
Page 136
Four-Wheel Drive If the vehicle has Four-Wheel Drive, you can send the engine’s driving power to all four wheels for extra traction. To get the most satisfaction out of Four-Wheel Drive, you must be familiar with its operation. Read the following before using Four-Wheel Drive. See the appropriate text for the transfer case in the vehicle. Notice: Driving on clean, dry pavement in Four-Wheel-Drive High or Four-Wheel-Drive Low for an extended period of time may cause premature wear on your vehicle’s powertrain. Do not drive on clean, dry pavement in Four-Wheel-Drive High or Four-Wheel-Drive Low for extended periods of time. While driving on clean dry pavement and during tight turns, you ma[...]
-
Page 137
A Four-Wheel Drive indicator light comes on when you shift into four-wheel drive and the front axle engages. See Four-Wheel-Drive Light on page 3-51 . Some delay between shifting and when the indicator light comes on is normal. Recommended Transfer Case Settings Driving Conditions Transfer Case Settings 2 m 4 m 4 n N Normal YES Severe YES Extreme YES Vehicle in Tow* YES *See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 4-45 Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-45 Notice: Driving on clean, dry pavement in four-wheel drive for an extended period of time can cause premature wear on the vehicle’s powertrain. Do not drive on clean, dry pavement in Four-Wheel Drive for extended periods of time. 4 n (Four-Wheel-[...]
-
Page 138
A parking brake symbol is located next to the N (Neutral) symbol as a reminder to set the parking brake before shifting the transfer case into N (Neutral). { CAUTION: Shifting the transfer case to Neutral can cause the vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in P (Park). You or someone else could be seriously injured. Be sure to set the parking brake before placing the transfer case in Neutral. See Parking Brake on page 2-50 . N (Neutral): Shift to this setting only when the vehicle needs to be towed. See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 4-45 or Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-45 . 2 m (Two-Wheel-Drive High): This setting is used for driving in most street and highway situations. The fr[...]
-
Page 139
When Using the Manual Transfer Case • Shifting should be made using quick motions. Shifting slowly may make it more diff icult to shift. • You may notice that it is harder to shift when the vehicle is cold. After the vehicle warms up the shifting will return to normal. • While in Four-Wheel High or Four-Wheel-Drive Low you may experience reduced fuel economy. • Avoid driving in Four-Wheel Drive on clean, dry pavement. It may cause your tires to wear faster, make the transfer case harder to shift, and run noisier. • If the transfer case shifter is in the N (Neutral) position and you have diff iculty reaching the selected transfer case mode, with the engine running, shift the transmi[...]
-
Page 140
Shifting In or Out of Four-Wheel-Drive Low Notice: Shifting the transfer case into Four-Wheel-Drive Low while moving at speeds faster than 3 mph (5 km/h) may cause premature wear to the transfer case, and may cause the gears to grind. To avoid causing premature wear, and grinding the gears, do not shift the transfer case into Four-Wheel-Drive Low while the vehicle is moving faster than 3 mph (5 km/h). Shifting into Four-Wheel-Drive Low should be done, if possible, with the vehicle at a slight roll, 3 mph (5 km/h) or less. • Shift the transmission into N (Neutral). { CAUTION: Shifting the transfer case to Neutral can cause the vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in P (Park). You or [...]
-
Page 141
Electronic Transfer Case The transfer case knob is located next to the steering column. Use the dial to shift into and out of four-wheel drive. Recommended Transfer Case Settings Driving Conditions Transfer Case Settings 2 m 4 m 4 n N Normal YES Severe YES Extreme YES Vehicle in Tow* YES *See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 4-45 Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-45 You can choose among four driving settings: Indicator lights in the dial show which setting you are in. The indicator lights will come on briefly when you turn on the ignition and one will stay on. If the lights do not come on, you should take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service. An indicator light flashes while shif[...]
-
Page 142
4 m (Four-Wheel-Drive High): Use the Four-Wheel-Drive High position when extra traction is needed, such as on snowy or icy roads or in most off-road situations. This setting also engages the front axle to help drive the vehicle. This is the best setting to use when plowing snow. 4 n (Four-Wheel-Drive Low): This setting also engages the front axle and delivers extra torque. You may never need this setting. It sends maximum power to all four wheels. You might choose Four-Wheel-Drive Low while driving off-road in deep sand, deep mud, deep snow, and while climbing or descending steep hills. If the vehicle has StabiliTrak ® , shifting into Four-Wheel-Drive Low will turn Traction Control and Stab[...]
-
Page 143
Shifting Into Two-Wheel-Drive High Turn the knob to the Two-Wheel-Drive High position. This can be done at any speed, except when shifting from Four-Wheel-Drive Low. See Shifting Out of Four-Wheel-Drive Low for more information. Shifting Into Four-Wheel Drive Low When Four-Wheel-Drive Low is engaged, vehicle speed should be kept below 45 mph. Extended high-speed operation in Four-Wheel-Drive Low may damage or shorten the life of the drivetrain. To shift to the Four-Wheel-Drive Low position, the ignition must be in ON/RUN and the vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) with the transmission in N (Neutral). The preferred method for shifting into Four-Wheel-Drive Low is to ha[...]
-
Page 144
Shifting Out of Four-Wheel-Drive Low To shift from Four-Wheel-Drive Low to Four-Wheel-Drive High, or Two-Wheel-Drive High, the vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) with the transmission in N (Neutral) and the ignition in ON/RUN. The preferred method for shifting out of Four-Wheel-Drive Low is to have the vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Turn the knob to the Four-Wheel-Drive High, or Two-Wheel-Drive High position. You must wait for the Four-Wheel-Drive High, or Two-Wheel-Drive High indicator light to stop flashing and remain on before shifting the transmission into gear. Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear before the requested mode indicator light ha[...]
-
Page 145
7. If the engine is running, verify that the transfer case is in N (Neutral) by shifting the transmission to R (Reverse) for one second, then shift the transmission to D (Drive) for one second. 8. Turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY, which will turn the engine off. 9. Place the transmission shift lever in P (Park). 10. Release the parking brake prior to moving the vehicle. 11. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. Shifting Out of Neutral To shift the transfer case out of N (Neutral) do the following: 1. Set the parking brake and apply the regular brake pedal. 2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with the engine off, and shift the transmission to N (Neutral). 3. Turn the transfer case dial to Two-Wheel-Dri[...]
-
Page 146
Use the dial to shift into and out of Four-Wheel Drive. You can choose among five driving settings: Indicator lights in the dial show which setting you are in. The indicator lights will come on briefly when you turn on the ignition and one will stay on. If the lights do not come on, you should take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service. An indicator light will flash while shifting the transfer case. It will remain illuminated when the shift is complete. If for some reason the transfer case cannot make a requested shift, it will return to the last chosen setting. 2 m (Two-Wheel-Drive High): This setting is used for driving in most street and highway situations. The front axle is [...]
-
Page 147
{ CAUTION: Shifting the transfer case to N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in P (Park). You or someone else could be seriously injured. Be sure to set the parking brake before placing the transfer case in N (Neutral). See Parking Brake on page 2-50 . N (Neutral): Shift the vehicle’s transfer case to N (Neutral) only when towing the vehicle. See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 4-45 or Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-45 for more information. If the SERVICE 4–Wheel Drive message stays on, you should take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service. See “Service 4–Wheel Drive message” under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-66 . Shifting Into[...]
-
Page 148
You must wait for the Four-Wheel-Drive Low indicator light to stop flashing and remain on before shifting the transmission into gear. Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear before the requested mode indicator light has stopped flashing could damage the transfer case. To help avoid damaging the vehicle, always wait for the mode indicator lights to stop flashing before shifting the transmission into gear. It is typical for the vehicle to exhibit significant engagement noise and bump when shifting between Four-Wheel-Drive Low and Four-Wheel-Drive High ranges or from N (Neutral) with the engine running. If the knob is turned to the Four-Wheel-Drive Low position when the vehicle is in ge[...]
-
Page 149
Shifting into Neutral To shift the transfer case to N (Neutral) do the following: 1. Make sure the vehicle is parked so that it will not roll. 2. Set the parking brake and apply the regular brake pedal. See Parking Brake on page 2-50 for more information. 3. Start the vehicle or turn the ignition to ON/RUN. 4. Put the transmission in N (Neutral). 5. Shift the transfer case to Two-Wheel Drive High. 6. Turn the transfer case dial clockwise to N (Neutral) until it stops and hold it there until the N (Neutral) light starts blinking. This will take at least 10 seconds. Then slowly release the dial to the four low position. The N (Neutral) light will come on when the transfer case shift to N (Neut[...]
-
Page 150
Parking Brake For vehicles with a release handle, set the parking brake by holding the regular brake pedal down, then pushing down the parking brake pedal. If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will come on. See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-42 . A chime sounds and the warning light flashes when the parking brake is applied and the vehicle is moving at least 5 mph (8 km/h). To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal down. Then pull the bottom edge of the lever with the parking brake symbol, located above the parking brake pedal. If the ignition is on when the parking brake is released, the brake system warning light goes off. Notice: Driving with the p[...]
-
Page 151
For vehicles without a release handle, set the parking brake by holding the regular brake pedal down, then pushing down the parking brake pedal. If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will come on. See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-42 . Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can overheat the brake system and cause premature wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure that the parking brake is fully released and the brake warning light is off before driving. To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal down, then push down momentarily on the parking brake pedal until you feel the pedal release. Slowly pull your foot up off the park brake pedal. If th[...]
-
Page 152
Shifting Into Park { CAUTION: It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow. With four-wheel drive, if the transfer case is in N (Neutral), the vehicle will be free to roll, even if the shift lever is in P (Park). So, be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear — not in N (Neutral). If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 4-50 . 1. Hold the brake pedal down, then set [...]
-
Page 153
Leaving the Vehicle With the Engine Running { CAUTION: It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with the engine running. The vehicle could move suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. If you have four-wheel drive and the transfer case is in N (Neutral), the vehicle will be free to roll, even if the shift lever is in P (Park). So be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear — not in N (Neutral). And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine running, it could overheat and even catch fire. You or others could be injured. Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running unless you have to. If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine runnin[...]
-
Page 154
Shifting Out of Park This vehicle is equipped with an electronic shift lock release system. The shift lock release is designed to: • Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift lever is in P (Park) with the shift lever button fully released, and • Prevent movement of the shift lever out of P (Park), unless the ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal is applied. The shift lock release is always functional except in the case of an uncharged or low voltage (less than 9 volt) battery. If the vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery with low voltage, try charging or jump starting the battery. See Jump Starting on page 5-44 for more information. To shift out o[...]
-
Page 155
Engine Exhaust { CAUTION: Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled. Exposure to CO can cause unconsciousness and even death. Exhaust may enter the vehicle if: • The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation (parking garages, tunnels, deep snow that may block underbody airflow or tail pipes). • The exhaust smells or sounds strange or different. • The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion or damage. CAUTION: (Continued) CAUTION: (Continued) • The vehicle’s exhaust system has been modified, damaged or improperly repaired. • There are holes or openings in the vehicle body from damage or after-market modifications that are not completely seale[...]
-
Page 156
Running the Vehicle While Parked It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you ever have to, here are some things to know. { CAUTION: Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause unconsciousness and even death. Never run the engine in an enclosed area that has no fresh air ventilation. For more information, see Engine Exhaust on page 2-55 . { CAUTION: It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the automatic transmission shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. Do [...]
-
Page 157
{ CAUTION: Four-wheel drive vehicles with the transfer case in N (Neutral) will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the automatic transmission shift lever is in P (Park). So, be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear — not in N (Neutral). Always set the parking brake. Follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will not move. See Shifting Into Park on page 2-52 . If pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 4-50 . Mirrors Manual Rearview Mirror Hold the inside rearview mirror in the center to move it for a clearer view behind your vehicle. Adjust the mirror to avoid glare from the headlamps behind you. Push the tab forward for daytime use and pull it for nighttime use. Automatic[...]
-
Page 158
Cleaning the Mirror Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror. Use a soft towel dampened with water. Outside Manual Mirrors Adjust the outside mirror so that the side of the vehicle and the area behind are seen. Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage when going through an automatic car wash. To fold, push the mirror toward the vehicle. Push the mirror outward, to return to its original position. Using hood-mounted air deflectors and add-on convex mirror attachments could decrease mirror performance. Outside Towing Mirrors If the vehicle has towing mirrors, they can be adjusted for a clearer view of the objects behind you. Manually pull out the mirror head to extend it fo[...]
-
Page 159
Outside Power Mirrors Vehicles with outside power mirrors have controls located on the driver door. To adjust each mirror: 1. Press (A) or (B) to select the driver or passenger side mirror. 2. Press one of the four arrows located on the control pad to adjust the mirror. 3. Adjust the outside mirror so that the side of the vehicle and the area behind are seen. 4. Press either (A) or (B) again to deselect the mirror. Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage when going through an automatic car wash. To fold, push the mirror toward the vehicle. Push the mirror outward, to return to its original position. Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors Vehicles with outside power foldaway mirrors have c[...]
-
Page 160
Resetting the Power Foldaway Mirrors Reset the power foldaway mirrors if: • The mirrors are accidentally obstructed while folding. • They are accidentally manually folded/unfolded. • The mirrors will not stay in the unfolded position. • The mirrors vibrate at normal driving speeds. Fold and unfold the mirrors one time using the mirror controls to reset them to their normal position. A popping noise may be heard during the resetting of the power foldaway mirrors. This sound is normal after a manual folding operation. Automatic Dimming The driver outside mirror adjusts for the glare of the headlamps behind you. See Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror on page 2-57 for more information. Tu[...]
-
Page 161
Outside Convex Mirror { CAUTION: A convex mirror can make things, like other vehicles, look farther away than they really are. If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you could hit a vehicle on the right. Check the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes. The passenger side mirror is convex shaped. A convex mirror’s surface is curved so more can be seen from the driver seat. Outside Heated Mirrors For vehicles with heated mirrors: < (Rear Window Defogger): Press to heat the mirrors. Only the upper glass of the mirror is heated. The lower convex part of the mirror is not heated. Depending on the vehicle’s features, see “Rear Window Defogger” under, Clim[...]
-
Page 162
Object Detection Systems Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) For vehicles with the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system, it operates at speeds less than 5 mph (8 km/h), and assists the driver with parking and avoiding objects while in R (Reverse). The sensors on the rear bumper are used to detect the distance to an object up to 8 feet (2.5 m) behind the vehicle, and at least 10 inches (25.4 cm) off the ground. { CAUTION: The Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system does not replace driver vision. It cannot detect: • objects that are below the bumper, underneath the vehicle, or if they are too close or far from the vehicle • children, pedestrians, bicyclists, or pets. If you[...]
-
Page 163
The display is located near the passenger side rear window and can be seen by looking over your right shoulder. URPA uses three color-coded lights to provide distance and system information. How the System Works URPA comes on automatically when the shift lever is moved into R (Reverse). The rear display briefly illuminates to indicate the system is working. URPA operates only at speeds less than 5 mph (8 km/h). If the vehicle is above this speed, the red light on the rear display will flash. To be detected, objects must be at least 10 inches (25.4 cm) of f the ground and below tailgate level. Objects must also be within 8 feet (2.5 m) from the rear bumper. This distance may be less during [...]
-
Page 164
The system can be disabled by pressing the rear park aid disable button located next to the radio. The indicator light will come on and PARK ASSIST OFF displays on the Driver Information Center (DIC) to indicate that URPA is off, see DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-66 for information about clearing the message. Notice: If you use URPA while the tailgate is lowered, it may not detect an object behind your vehicle, and you might back into the object and damage your vehicle. Always verify the tailgate is closed when using URPA or turn off URPA when driving with the tailgate lowered. When the System Does Not Seem to Work Properly If the URPA system will not activate due to a temporary condit[...]
-
Page 165
Rear Vision Camera (RVC) This vehicle may have a Rear Vision Camera system. Read this entire section before using it. { CAUTION: The Rear Vision Camera (RVC) system does not replace driver vision. RVC does not: • Detect objects that are outside the camera’s field of view, below the bumper, or underneath the vehicle. • Detect children, pedestrians, bicyclists, or pets. Do not back the vehicle by only looking at the rear vision camera screen, or use the screen during longer, higher speed backing maneuvers or where there could be cross-traff ic. Your judged distances using the screen will differ from actual distances. So if you do not use proper care before backing up, you could hit a ve[...]
-
Page 166
Vehicles With Navigation System The rear vision camera system is designed to help the driver when backing up by displaying a view of the area behind the vehicle. When the driver shifts the vehicle into R (Reverse), the video image automatically appears on the navigation screen. Once the driver shifts out of R (Reverse), the navigation screen will go back to the last screen that had been displayed, after a delay. Turning the Rear Vision Camera System On or Of f To turn the rear vision camera system on or off: 1. Shift into P (Park). 2. Press the MENU button to enter the configure menu options, then press the MENU hard key to select Display or touch the Display screen button. 3. Select the Re[...]
-
Page 167
Adjusting the Brightness and Contrast of the Screen To adjust the brightness and contrast of the screen, press the MENU button while the rear vision camera image is on the display. Any adjustments made will only affect the rear vision camera screen. ] (Brightness): Touch the + (plus) or – (minus) screen buttons to increase or decrease the brightness of the screen. _ (Contrast): Touch the + (plus) or – (minus) screen buttons to increase or decrease the contrast of the screen. Symbols The navigation system may have a feature that lets the driver view symbols on the navigation screen while using the rear vision camera. The Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist (URPA) system must not be disabled to us[...]
-
Page 168
Rear Vision Camera Location The image is provided by the camera located in the bezel for the tailgate handle. The camera uses a special lens. The distance of the image that appears on the screen differs from the actual distance. The area displayed by the camera is limited. The camera does not display objects which are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper. The area displayed on the screen can vary according to vehicle orientation or road conditions. The following illustration shows the field of view that the camera provides. 2-68[...]
-
Page 169
Disconnecting the Rear Vision Camera To disconnect the camera: 1. Remove the license plate. 2. Disconnect the camera connector from the chassis harness, located behind the license plate, by pressing on the release tab on the chassis harness. A. Camera connector cap tab B. Chassis harness C. Release tab D. Camera connector E. Retaining clip F. Protective connector cap G. Camera connector cap 3. Disconnect the protective connector cap from the chassis harness by pressing on the release tab on the chassis harness, then remove the cap. 4. Install the protective connector cap onto the chassis harness where the camera connector was located. A. Chassis harness B. Release tab C. Protective connector[...]
-
Page 170
When the System Does Not Seem To Work Properly The rear vision camera system might not work properly or display a clear image if: • The RVC is turned off. See “Turning the Rear Camera System On or Off” earlier in this section. • It is dark. • The sun or the beam of headlights is shining directly into the camera lens. • Ice, snow, mud, or anything else builds up on the camera lens. Clean the lens, rinse it with water, and wipe it with a soft cloth. • The back of the vehicle is in an accident, the position and mounting angle of the camera can change or the camera can be affected. Be sure to have the camera and its position and mounting angle checked at your dealer/retailer. • T[...]
-
Page 171
OnStar ® System OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live advisors to provide a wide range of safety, security, information, and convenience services. If the airbags deploy, the system is designed to make an automatic call to OnStar Emergency advisors who can request emergency services be sent to your location. If the keys are locked in the vehicle, call OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR to have a signal sent to unlock the doors. OnStar Hands-Free Calling, including 30 trial minutes good for 60 days, is available on most vehicles. OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation service, with one trial route, is available on most vehicles. Press the OnStar button to have an OnStar advisor contact Roadside [...]
-
Page 172
OnStar Services Available with the Safe & Sound Plan • Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment • Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN) (If equipped) • Link to Emergency Services • Roadside Assistance • Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance • Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert • OnStar Vehicle Diagnostic Email • GM Goodwrench On Demand Diagnostics • OnStar Hands-Free Calling with 30 trial minutes • OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only) OnStar Services Included with Directions & Connections Plan • All Safe and Sound Plan Services • OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped) or Driving Directions - Advisor delivered • RideAssist • Information and Conve[...]
-
Page 173
OnStar Virtual Advisor OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar Hands-Free Calling that uses minutes to access location-based weather, local traff ic reports, and stock quotes. Press the phone button and give a few simple voice commands to browse through the various topics. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more information. This feature is only available in the continental U.S. OnStar Steering Wheel Controls This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can be used to interact with OnStar Hands-Free Calling. See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-140 for more information. On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to dial numbers into voice mail systems, or to dial phone exten[...]
-
Page 174
The vehicle must have a working electrical system, including adequate battery power, for the OnStar equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing OnStar service at any particular time or place. Some examples are damage to important parts of the vehicle in a crash, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather or wireless phone network congestion. Your Responsibility Increase the volume of the radio if the OnStar advisor cannot be heard. If the light next to the OnStar buttons is red, the system may not be functioning properly. Press the OnStar button and request a vehicle diagnostic. If the light appears clear (no light is appearing), y[...]
-
Page 175
Universal Home Remote System Operation (With Three Round LED) This vehicle may have the Universal Home Remote System. If there are three round Light Emitting Diode (LED) indicator lights above the Universal Home Remote buttons, follow the instructions below. This system provides a way to replace up to three remote control transmitters used to activate devices such as garage door openers, security systems, and home automation devices. Do not use this system with any garage door opener that does not have the stop and reverse feature. This includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982. Read the instructions completely before attempting to program the transmitter. Becau[...]
-
Page 176
Programming Universal Home Remote — Rolling Code For questions or help programming the Universal Home Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728 or go to learcar2u.com. Most garage door openers sold after 1996 are Rolling Code units. Programming a garage door opener involves time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure before starting. Otherwise, the device will time out and the procedure will have to be repeated. To program up to three devices: 1. From inside the vehicle, press the two outside buttons at the same time for one to two seconds, and immediately release them. 2. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn” or “Smart” butto[...]
-
Page 177
4. Immediately, within one second, release the button when the garage door moves. The indicator light will blink rapidly until programming is complete. 5. Press and release the same button again. The garage door should move, confirming that programming is successful and complete. To program another Rolling Code device such as an additional garage door opener, a security device, or home automation device, repeat Steps 1 through 5, choosing a different function button in Step 3 than what was used for the garage door opener. If these instructions do not work, the garage door opener is probably a Fixed Code unit. Follow the Programming instructions that follow for a Fixed Code garage door opene[...]
-
Page 178
The garage door opener receiver (motor head unit) could also have a row of dip switches that can be used when programming the Universal Home Remote. If the total number of switches on the motor head and hand held transmitter are different, or if the dip switch settings are different, use the dip switch settings on the motor head unit to program the Universal Home Remote. The motor head dip switch settings can also be used when the original hand held transmitter is not available. The panel of switches might not appear exactly as they do in the examples above, but they should be similar. The switch positions on the hand-held transmitter could be labeled, as follows: • A switch in the up posi[...]
-
Page 179
2. Write down the eight to 12 switch settings from left to right as follows: • When a switch is in the up position, write “Left.” • When a switch is in the down position, write “Right.” • If a switch is set between the up and down position, write “Middle.” The switch settings written down in Step 2 now become the button strokes to be entered into the Universal Home Remote in Step 4. Be sure to enter the switch settings written down in Step 2, in order from left to right, into the Universal Home Remote, when completing Step 4. 3. From inside your vehicle, first firmly press all three buttons at the same time for about three seconds. Release the buttons to put the Universal[...]
-
Page 180
5. After entering all of the switch positions, again, firmly press and release all three buttons at the same time. The indicator lights will turn on. 6. Press and hold the button that will be used to control the garage door until the garage door moves. The indicator light above the selected button should slowly blink. This button may need to be held for up to 55 seconds. 7. Immediately release the button when the garage door moves. The indicator light will blink rapidly until programming is complete. 8. Press and release the same button again. The garage door should move, confirming that programming is successful and complete. To program another Fixed Code device such as an additional gara[...]
-
Page 181
Storage Areas Glove Box Lift up on the glove box lever to open it. Cupholders Vehicles with cupholders, have them located on and behind the center console and in the rear seat armrest. Pull the loop down on the rear seat armrest to access the cupholders. Pull downward on the lid to access the cupholders behind the center console. Instrument Panel Storage Vehicles that have an instrument panel storage area, have it located above the glove box. Press and hold the driver side of the handle in and pull out on the exposed portion of the handle to access the storage area. 2-81[...]
-
Page 182
Center Console Storage Vehicles with an upper and lower center console storage area, cupholders are included. Pull the lever (A) up to access the upper storage area. Raise the upper storage bin, then pull the lever (B) up to access the lower storage area. Use the key to lock and unlock the lower storage area. Luggage Carrier Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrier that weighs more than 200 lbs (91 kg) or hangs over the rear or sides of the vehicle can damage the vehicle. Load cargo so that it rests on the slats as far forward as possible and against the side rails, making sure to fasten it securely. For vehicles with a luggage carrier, items can be loaded on top of the vehicle. The lugg[...]
-
Page 183
To prevent damage or loss of cargo while driving, periodically stop and check to make sure cargo is still securely fastened. • If small heavy objects are placed on the roof, cut a piece of 3/8 inch plywood to fit inside the crossrails and siderails to spread the load. Tie the plywood to the siderail supports. • Tie the load and secure it to the crossrails or the siderail supports. Use the crossrails only to keep the load from sliding. To move a crossrail, lift the release lever up, on both sides of the rail. Then slide the crossrail to the desired position balancing the force side to side. Press the release lever down on both sides of the rail, down to tighten it. Try to slide the cross[...]
-
Page 184
To adjust a tie-down, pull the locator pin out and move the tie-down to another location making sure the locator pin lines up with a locator hole on the rail. The tie-down pin may not be installed correctly if the pin does not line up, turn it over and reinstall. The tie-down will not move when the pin is completely installed. The maximum load for each rail is 500 lbs (227 kg). The rails are notched at each end which allows the tie-downs to be removed and placed on another rail. To remove, pull the locator pin out and slide the tie-down to the end of the rail and pull back. To remove or install cargo tie-downs at the front of the bed, slide the corner cap towards the center of the bed to exp[...]
-
Page 185
Sunroof On vehicle with a power sliding sunroof, the ignition needs to be turned to RUN, or the Retained Accessory Power (RAP) must be activated to open or close the sunroof. When RAP is active, the sunroof will work for 10 minutes after the ignition is turned off, or until the driver’s door is opened. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-23 for more information. Extended Cab If your vehicle is an extended cab, the sunroof switch is located on the headliner above the rearview mirror. Vent: From the closed position, press and hold the rear of the switch to vent the sunroof. To close the sunroof, press and hold the front of the switch. Open: From the vent position, the sunroof can be[...]
-
Page 186
Crew Cab If your vehicle is a crew cab, there are two sunroof switches located in the overhead console above the rearview mirror. Vent: From the closed position, press the rear of the passenger’s side switch to vent the sunroof. To close the sunroof, press and hold the front of the passenger’s side switch. Manual-Open/Manual-Close: To open the sunroof press and hold the rear of the driver’s side switch until the sunroof reaches the desired position. To close the sunroof, press and hold the front of the driver’s side switch until the sunroof reaches the desired position. When the sunroof is opened, an air deflector will automatically raise. The air deflector will retract when the su[...]
-
Page 187
Instrument Panel Overview .............................. .3-4 Instrument Panel Overview (Base/Uplevel version) .................................................... .3-4 Instrument Panel Overview (Premium version) ...................................... .3-6 Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... .3-8 H o r n ............................................................ .3-8 Tilt Wheel .................................................... .3-8 Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................ .3-9 Turn and Lane-Change Signals ....................... .3-9 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ................ .3-10 Flash-to-Pass .............................................. .3-1[...]
-
Page 188
Voltmeter Gage (US-Canada) ........................ .3-41 Brake System Warning Light ......................... .3-42 Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light .... .3-43 StabiliTrak ® Indicator Light ............................ .3-44 Engine Coolant Temperature Gage (US-Canada) ............................................ .3-44 Tire Pressure Light ...................................... .3-45 Malfunction Indicator Lamp ............................ .3-45 Oil Pressure Gage (US-Canada) .................... .3-48 Oil Pressure Light ........................................ .3-49 Security Light .............................................. .3-50 Fog Lamp Light ....................................[...]
-
Page 189
✍ NOTES 3-3[...]
-
Page 190
Instrument Panel Overview Instrument Panel Overview (Base/Uplevel version) 3-4[...]
-
Page 191
The main components of the instrument panel are the following: A. Outlet Adjustment on page 3-33 . B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-9 . C. Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-53 . D. Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3-8 . E. Instrument Panel Cluster (US-Canada) on page 3-34 . F. Shift Lever. See Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2-28 . Tow/Haul Selector Button (If Equipped). See Tow/Haul Mode on page 2-34 . Range Selection Mode (Allison Transmission and Hydra-Matic ® 6-Speed Button (If Equipped). See Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2-28 . G. Audio System(s) on page 3-85 . H. Instrument Panel Storage on page 2-81 . I. Integrated Trailer Brake Controller (If E[...]
-
Page 192
Instrument Panel Overview (Premium version) 3-6[...]
-
Page 193
The main components of the instrument panel are the following: A. Outlet Adjustment on page 3-33 . B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-9 . C. Instrument Panel Cluster (US-Canada) on page 3-34 . D. Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3-8 . E. Shift Lever. See Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2-28 . F. Tow/Haul Mode on page 2-34 (If Equipped). G. Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-53 . H. Audio System(s) on page 3-85 . I. Exterior Lamps on page 3-16 . J. Integrated Trailer Brake Controller (If Equipped). See Towing a Trailer on page 4-50 . K. Dome Lamp Override on page 3-20 . Dome Lamps on page 3-20 . L. Automatic Transfer Case Control. (If Equipped). See Four-Wheel Drive o[...]
-
Page 194
Hazard Warning Flashers | (Hazard Warning Flasher): Press this button located on top of the steering column, to make the front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. This warns others that you are having trouble. Press again to turn the flashers off. When the hazard warning flashers are on, the vehicle’s turn signals will not work. Horn To sound the horn, press the horn symbols located on the steering wheel. Tilt Wheel The tilt wheel lets the steering wheel be adjusted. The tilt lever is located on the lower left side of the steering column. To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the lever. Then move the steering wheel to a comfortable position and release the lever t[...]
-
Page 195
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever The lever on the left side of the steering column includes the following: G : Turn and Lane Change Signals 53 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer N : Windshield Wipers L : Windshield Washer Flash-to-Pass. Exterior Lamps. Information for these features is on the pages following. Turn and Lane-Change Signals An arrow on the instrument panel cluster flashes in the direction of the turn or lane change. Move the lever all the way up or down to signal a turn. Raise or lower the lever for less than one second until the arrow starts to flash to signal a lane change. This causes the turn signals to automatically flash three times. It will flash six times if tow-haul m[...]
-
Page 196
Turn Signal On Chime If the turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash of the turn signal and the message TURN SIGNAL ON will also appear in the Driver Information Control (DIC). To turn the chime and message off, move the turn signal lever to the off position. Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer 53 (Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer): To change the headlamps from low to high beam, push the lever toward the instrument panel. To return to low-beam headlamps, pull the multifunction lever toward you. Then release it. When the high beams are on, this indicator light on the instrument panel cluster will also be on. Flash-to-Pass This feature lets you us[...]
-
Page 197
9 (Off): Turns the wipers of f. 6 (Delay): Turn the band to adjust the delay time. The delay between wiping cycles becomes shorter as the band is moved to the top of the lever. This can be very useful in light rain or snow. 6 (Low Speed): For steady wiping at low speed. ? (High Speed): For high-speed wiping. Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using them. If they are frozen to the windshield, gently loosen or thaw them. Damaged wiper blades may not clear the windshield well, making it harder to see and drive safely. If the blades do become damaged, install new blades or blade inserts. For more information, see Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on page 5-64 . Heavy snow or ice ca[...]
-
Page 198
Windshield Washer { CAUTION: In freezing weather, do not use your washer until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your vision. L (Washer Fluid): Push the paddle marked with the windshield washer symbol at the top of the multifunction lever, to spray washer fluid on the windshield. The wipers clear the window and then either stop or return to the preset speed. Heated Windshield Washer For vehicles with the heated windshield washer fluid system it can be used to help clear ice, snow, tree sap, or bugs from the windshield. _ (Heated Washer Fluid): Press the heated washer fluid button to activate the heated windshield washer fluid s[...]
-
Page 199
Cruise Control { CAUTION: Cruise control can be dangerous where you cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do not use the cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traff ic. Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire traction can cause excessive wheel slip, and you could lose control. Do not use cruise control on slippery roads. With cruise control, a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more can be maintained without keeping your foot on the accelerator. Cruise control does not work at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h). When the brakes are applied, cruise control is turned off. For vehicles with an Allison ® or Hydra-Matic 6-speed automatic[...]
-
Page 200
The cruise control buttons are located on left side of the steering wheel. T (On/Off): Turns the system on or of f. The indicator light is on when cruise control is on and turns off when cruise control is off. + RES (Resume/Accelerate): Press to make the vehicle accelerate or resume to a previously set speed. SET – (Set/Coast): Press to set the speed or make the vehicle decelerate. [ (Cancel): Press to cancel cruise control without erasing the set speed from memory. Setting Cruise Control Cruise control will not work if the parking brake is set, or if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low. The cruise control light on the instrument panel cluster will come on after the cruise contro[...]
-
Page 201
Once the vehicle speed reaches about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, press the +RES button on the steering wheel. The vehicle will go back to the previous set speed and stay there. Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control To increase the cruise speed while using cruise control: • Press and hold the +RES button on the steering wheel until the desired speed is reached, then release it. • To increase vehicle speed in small increments, press the +RES button. Each time this is done, the vehicle goes about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster. Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control To reduce the vehicle speed while using cruise control: • Press and hold the SET– button on the steering wheel until the d[...]
-
Page 202
Exterior Lamps The exterior lamps control is located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel. It controls the following systems: • Headlamps • Taillamps • Parking Lamps • License Plate Lamps • Instrument Panel Lights The exterior lamps control has four positions: O (Off): Turns of f the automatic headlamps and daytime running lamps (DRL). Turn the headlamp control to the off position again to turn the automatic headlamps or DRL back on. For vehicles first sold in Canada, the off position will only work when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park). AUTO (Automatic): Automatically turns on the headlamps at normal brightness, together with the following: • Parking La[...]
-
Page 203
2 (Headlamps): Turns on the headlamps together with the following: • Parking Lamps • Instrument Panel Lights • Taillamps • License Plate Lamps When the headlamps are turned on while the vehicle is on, the headlamps turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is turned off. When the headlamps are turned on while the vehicle is off, the headlamps will stay on for 10 minutes before automatically turning off to prevent the battery from being drained. Turn the headlamp control to off and then back to the headlamp on position to make the headlamps stay on for an additional 10 minutes. Push the turn signal/multifunction lever toward the instrument panel to change the headlamps from[...]
-
Page 204
Automatic Headlamp System When it is dark enough outside, the automatic headlamp system turns on the headlamps at the normal brightness, along with the taillamps, sidemarker, parking lamps, and the instrument panel lights. The radio lights will also be dim. To turn off the automatic headlamp system, turn the exterior lamps switch to the off position and then release it. For vehicles first sold in Canada, the transmission must be in the P (Park) position, before the automatic headlamp system can be turned off. The vehicle has a light sensor located on the top of the instrument panel in the defroster grille that regulates when the automatic headlamps turn on. Do not cover the sensor or the he[...]
-
Page 205
Puddle Lamps If the vehicle has puddle lamps, they come on when the unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter is pressed. The lamps time out or turn off once the engine is started. Fog Lamps For vehicles with fog lamps, the control is located next to the exterior lamps control on the instrument panel, to the left of the steering column. The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position for the fog lamps to come on. # (Fog Lamps): Press to turn the fog lamps on or off. A light will come on in the instrument panel cluster. When the fog lamps are turned on, the parking lamps automatically turn on. When the headlamps are changed to high-beam, the fog lamps also go off. When the high-[...]
-
Page 206
For further information on roof mount emergency lamp installation, please visit the GM Upfitter website at www.gmupfitters.com or contact your dealer. If the vehicle has this button, the vehicle may have the snow plow prep package. For further information see Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment on page 4-38 . Instrument Panel Brightness D (Instrument Panel Brightness): This feature controls the brightness of the instrument panel lights and is located next to the exterior lamp control. Push the knob to extend out and then it can be turned. Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to brighten or dim the instrument panel lights. Turning the knob to the farthest clockwise position turns[...]
-
Page 207
Reading Lamps For vehicles with reading lamps, they are located on the overhead console. To turn on the reading lamps, press the button located next to each lamp. To turn them off, press the button again. The vehicle may also have reading lamps in other locations. To turn the lamps on or off, press the button located next to the lamp. If the vehicle has a DVD Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) system, press the lamp lenses to turn the lamps on or off. The lamps are fixed and cannot be adjusted. Cargo Lamp The cargo lamps come on by turning the instrument panel brightness control knob to the farthest clockwise position. This knob is located on the instrument panel and also turns on the dome lamps[...]
-
Page 208
EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the battery. It does this by balancing the generator’s output and the vehicle’s electrical needs. It can increase engine idle speed to generate more power, whenever needed. It can temporarily reduce the power demands of some accessories. Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels, without being noticeable. In rare cases at the highest levels of corrective action, this action may be noticeable to the driver. If so, a Driver Information Center (DIC) message might be displayed, such as BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE, BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY. If this message is displayed, it is recommended that the driver reduce the electrical loads as much[...]
-
Page 209
Certain power accessory plugs may not be compatible to the accessory power outlet and could result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a problem, see your dealer/retailer for additional information on the accessory power plugs. The accessory power outlets are powered, even when the ignition is in LOCK/OFF. Continuing to use power outlets while the ignition is in LOCK/OFF may cause the vehicle’s battery to run down. Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to the vehicle can damage it or keep other components from working as they should. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not use equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes. Check with [...]
-
Page 210
Climate Controls Climate Control System (With Air Conditioning) With this system the heating, cooling, and ventilation can be controlled. A. Fan Control B. Temperature Control C. Air Delivery Mode Control D. Air Conditioning E. Outside Air F. Recirculation G. Rear Window Defogger Temperature Control: Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the temperature inside the vehicle. 9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed. Turn the knob all the way counterclockwise to turn the front system off. Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to change the direction of the airflow inside the vehicle. The knob can be p[...]
-
Page 211
- (Defog): This mode clears the windows of fog or moisture. Air is directed to the windshield, floor outlets, and side window vents. 0 (Defrost): This mode removes fog or frost from the windshield more quickly. Air is directed to the windshield and the side window vents, with some air directed to the floor vents. The system automatically forces outside air into the vehicle. The recirculation mode cannot be selected in the defog or defrost mode. When either mode is selected, the system runs the air conditioning compressor, unless the outside temperature is close to freezing. Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear. : (Outside Air): Press to turn the outside air mode on. An [...]
-
Page 212
Rear Window Defogger For vehicles with a rear window defogger, a warming grid is used to remove fog from the rear window. < (Rear): Press to turn the rear window defogger on or off. An indicator light on the button comes on to show that the rear window defogger is on. The rear window defogger only works when the ignition is in ON/RUN. The rear window defogger stays on for approximately 10 minutes after the button is pressed, unless the ignition is turned to ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF. The defogger can also be turned off by turning off the engine. Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside of the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage the warming grid, and the repairs would no[...]
-
Page 213
Temperature Control: Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the temperature inside the vehicle. 9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed. Turn the knob all the way counterclockwise to turn the front system off. Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the temperature inside the vehicle. The knob can be positioned between two modes to select a combination of those modes. Select from the following: H (Vent): Air is directed to the instrument panel outlets. ) (Bi-Level): Air is divided between the instrument panel and floor outlets. 6 (Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets,[...]
-
Page 214
Dual Automatic Climate Control System The heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled with this system. The vehicle also has a flow-through ventilation system described later in this section. A. Driver and Passenger Temperature Controls B. Fan Control C. AUTO D. Defrost E. Recirculation F. Outside Air G. Air Delivery Mode Control H. Display I. Power Button J. Rear Window Defogger K. Air Conditioning L. PASS (Passenger) O (On/Off): Press to turn the climate control system on or off. Outside air still enters the vehicle, and is directed to the floor. This direction can be changed by pressing the mode button. Recirculation can be selected once you have selected vent or [...]
-
Page 215
The passenger’s temperature setting can be set to match the driver’s temperature setting by pressing the PASS button and turning off the PASS indicator. When the passenger’s temperature setting is set different than the driver’s setting, the indicator on the PASS button illuminates and both the driver side and passenger side temperature displays are shown. Automatic Operation AUTO (Automatic): When automatic operation is active the system controls the inside temperature, the air delivery, and the fan speed. Use the steps below to place the entire system in automatic mode: 1. Press the AUTO button. When AUTO is selected, the display changes to show the current temperature(s) and AUTO [...]
-
Page 216
Manual Operation DC (Fan Control): Press these buttons to increase or decrease the fan speed. Pressing either fan button while in automatic control places the fan under manual control. The fan setting remains displayed and the AUTO light turns off. The air delivery mode remains under automatic control. HG (Air Delivery Mode Control): Press these buttons to change the direction of the airflow in the vehicle. Repeatedly press either button until the desired mode appears on the display. Pressing either mode button while the system is off changes the air delivery mode without turning the system on. Pressing either mode button while in automatic control places the mode under manual control. The [...]
-
Page 217
# (Air Conditioning): Press to turn the air conditioning (A/C) compressor on and off. An indicator light comes on to show that the air conditioning is on. If this button is pressed when the air conditioning compressor is unavailable due to outside conditions, the indicator flashes three times and then turns off. If the air conditioning is on and the outside temperature drops below a temperature which is too cool for air conditioning to be effective, the air conditioning light turns of f to show that the air conditioning mode has been canceled. On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot inside air escape. This helps to reduce the time it takes for the vehicle to cool down. It also [...]
-
Page 218
Rear Window Defogger The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to remove fog from the rear window. < (Rear Window Defogger): For vehicles with this feature, press to turn the defogger on or off. It automatically turns off several minutes after it has been activated. The defogger can also be turned off by turning the engine off. Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear. Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp object to clear the inside rear window. Do not adhere anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass. These actions may damage the rear defogger. Repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Heated Mirrors: For vehicles with heated outside rearview mirror[...]
-
Page 219
The climate control system uses the information from these sensors to maintain your comfort setting by adjusting the outlet temperature, fan speed, and the air delivery mode. The system may also supply cooler air to the side of the vehicle facing the sun. The recirculation mode will also be used as needed to maintain cool outlet temperatures. Outlet Adjustment Use the air outlets located in the center and on the side of the instrument panel to direct the airflow. Use the thumbwheels near the air outlets to open or close off the airflow. Operation Tips • Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from air inlets at the base of the windshield that could block the flow of air into the vehicle. ?[...]
-
Page 220
Instrument Panel Cluster (US-Canada) The instrument cluster is designed to show how the vehicle is running. It shows how fast the vehicle is going, about how much fuel the vehicle has and many other things needed to drive safely and economically. For vehicles with a DURAMAX ® Diesel engine, see the DURAMAX ® Diesel manual for more information. United States Light Duty Premium version shown. Canada, Uplevel, Base, Heavy Duty Clusters similar. 3-34[...]
-
Page 221
Speedometer and Odometer The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in both miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h). The odometer shows how far the vehicle has been driven, in either miles (used in the United States) or kilometers (used in Canada). Engine Hour Meter Display The Driver Information Center (DIC) can also display the number of hours the engine has run. To display the engine hours, turn the ignition off, press and hold the reset button for at least four seconds. The hour meter displays for up to 30 seconds, or until the ignition is turned on. See DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-53 or DIC Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on page 3-59 fo[...]
-
Page 222
Safety Belt Reminders Safety Belt Reminder Light When the engine is started, a chime sounds for several seconds to remind a driver to fasten the safety belt, unless the driver safety belt is already buckled. The safety belt light comes on and stays on for several seconds, then flashes for several more. This chime and light are repeated if the driver remains unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver safety belt is already buckled, neither the chime nor the light comes on. Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light Several seconds after the engine is started, a chime sounds for several seconds to remind the front passenger to buckle their safety belt. This only occurs if the passenger a[...]
-
Page 223
Airbag Readiness Light The system checks the airbag’s electrical system for possible malfunctions. If the light stays on it indicates there is an electrical problem. The system check includes the airbag sensor, the pretensioners, the airbag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module. For more information on the airbag system, see Airbag System on page 1-73 . The airbag readiness light flashes for a few seconds when the engine is started. If the light does not come on then, have it fixed immediately. { CAUTION: If the airbag readiness light stays on after the vehicle is started or comes on while driving, it means the airbag system might not be working properly. The ai[...]
-
Page 224
Airbag Of f Light If the vehicle has an airbag on-off switch, it also has a passenger airbag status indicator located in the overhead console. When the vehicle is started, the passenger airbag status indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off, will light for several seconds as a system check. Then, after several more seconds, the status indicator ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol, will light to let you know the status of the right front passenger frontal airbag. When the right front passenger airbag is manually turned off using the airbag on-of f switch in the glove box, the indicator light OFF or the off symbol will come on and stay on as a reminder that the airba[...]
-
Page 225
{ CAUTION: If the right front passenger’s airbag is turned off for a person who is not in a risk group identified by the national government, that person will not have the extra protection of an airbag. In a crash, the airbag will not be able to inflate and help protect the person sitting there. Do not turn off the passenger’s airbag unless the person sitting there is in a risk group identified by the national government. See Airbag Off Switch on page 1-81 for more on this, including important safety information. { CAUTION: If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and stays on, it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system. For example, the right front passenger airba[...]
-
Page 226
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator If the vehicle has the passenger sensing system, the overhead console will have a passenger airbag status indicator. See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-84 for important safety information. When the vehicle is started, the passenger airbag status indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off, for several seconds as a system check. Then, after several more seconds, the status indicator will light either ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol to let you know the status of the right front passenger frontal airbag. If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger airbag status indicator, it means that the right front passenger fronta[...]
-
Page 227
Charging System Light This light comes on briefly when the ignition key is turned to START, but the engine is not running, as a check to show it is working. If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer. The light should go out once the engine starts. If it stays on, or comes on while driving, there could be a problem with the charging system. A charging system message in the Driver Information Center (DIC) can also appear. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-66 for more information. This light could indicate that there are problems with a generator drive belt, or that there is an electrical problem. Have it checked right away. If the vehicle must be driven a short d[...]
-
Page 228
Readings outside the normal operating range can also occur when a large number of electrical accessories are operating in the vehicle and the engine is left idling for an extended period. This condition is normal since the charging system is not able to provide full power at engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, this condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds allow the charging system to create maximum power. The vehicle can only be driven for a short time with the readings outside the normal operating range. If the vehicle must be driven, turn off all accessories, such as the radio and air conditioner. Readings outside the normal operating range indicate a possible probl[...]
-
Page 229
This light comes on briefly when the ignition key is turned to ON/RUN. If it does not come on then, have it fixed so it is ready to warn if there is a problem. { CAUTION: The brake system might not be working properly if the brake system warning light is on. Driving with the brake system warning light on can lead to a crash. If the light is still on after the vehicle has been pulled off the road and carefully stopped, have the vehicle towed for service. If the light comes on while driving, pull off the road and stop carefully. The pedal might be harder to push or might go closer to the floor. It can take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for service. See Tow[...]
-
Page 230
StabiliTrak ® Indicator Light For vehicles with the StabiliTrak ® system, this light comes on briefly while starting the engine. If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the indicator light then goes off. If the light comes on and stays on while driving, there could be a problem with the StabiliTrak ® system and the vehicle might need service. When this warning light is on, the StabiliTrak ® system is off and does not limit wheel spin. The light flashes if the system is active and is working to assist the driver with directional control of the vehicle in diff icult driving conditions. See StabiliTrak ® System on page 4-6 for [...]
-
Page 231
Tire Pressure Light For vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system, this light comes on briefly when the engine is started. It provides information about tire pressures and the Tire Pressure Monitoring System. When the Light is On Steady This indicates that one or more of the tires is significantly underinflated. A tire pressure message in the Driver Information Center (DIC), can accompany the light. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-66 for more information. Stop and check the tires as soon as it is safe to do so. If a tire is underinflated, inflate to the proper pressure. See Tires on page 5-64 for more information. When the Light Flashes First and Then is On Steady This ind[...]
-
Page 232
If the check engine light comes on and stays on, while the engine is running, this indicates that there is an OBD II problem and service is required. Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before any problem is apparent. Being aware of the light can prevent more serious damage to the vehicle. This system assists the service technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction. Notice: If the vehicle is continually driven with this light on, after a while, the emission controls might not work as well, the vehicle’s fuel economy might not be as good, and the engine might not run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that might not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Notice: Mo[...]
-
Page 233
Light On Steady: An emission control system malfunction has been detected on the vehicle. Diagnosis and service might be required. An emission system malfunction might be corrected by doing the following: • Make sure the fuel cap is fully installed. See Filling the Tank on page 5-10 . The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn the light off. • If the vehicle has been driven through a deep puddle of water, the vehicle’s electrical system might be wet. The condition is usually corrected when the elect[...]
-
Page 234
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs Some state/provincial and local governments have or might begin programs to inspect the emission control equipment on the vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent getting a vehicle registration. Here are some things to know to help the vehicle pass an inspection: • The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check engine light is on with the engine running, or if the key is in ON/RUN and the light is not on. • The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD II (on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical emission control systems have not been completely diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be considered [...]
-
Page 235
A reading outside the normal operating range can be caused by a dangerously low oil level or some other problem causing low oil pressure. Check the vehicle’s oil as soon as possible. See “OIL PRESSURE LOW” under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-66 and Engine Oil on page 5-15 . { CAUTION: Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. The engine can become so hot that it catches fire. Someone could be burned. Check the oil as soon as possible and have the vehicle serviced. Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance can damage the engine. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow the maintenance schedule in this manual for changing engine oil. Oil Pr[...]
-
Page 236
If the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil is not flowing through the engine properly. The vehicle could be low on oil and it might have some other system problem. Security Light For information regarding this light and the vehicle’s security system, see Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-17 . Fog Lamp Light The fog lamp light comes on when the fog lamps are in use. The light goes out when the fog lamps are turned off. See Fog Lamps on page 3-19 for more information. Cruise Control Light The cruise control light comes on whenever the cruise control is set. The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off. See Cruise Control on page 3-13 for more information. Highbeam On [...]
-
Page 237
Four-Wheel-Drive Light The four-wheel-drive light comes on when a vehicle with a manual transfer case is shifted into four-wheel drive and the front axle engages. Some delay between the shifting and the light coming on is normal. See Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-36 for more information. Tow/Haul Mode Light This light comes on when the Tow/Haul mode has been activated. For more information, see Tow/Haul Mode on page 2-34 . Fuel Gage When the ignition is on, the fuel gage shows about how much fuel is left in the fuel tank. An arrow on the fuel gage indicates the side of the vehicle the fuel door is on. The gage will first indicate empty before the vehicle is out of fuel, but the vehicle’s fue[...]
-
Page 238
When the fuel tank is low the FUEL LEVEL LOW message appears. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-66 for more information. Here are some situations owners can experience with the fuel gage. None of these indicate a problem with the fuel gage. • At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off before the gage reads full. • It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the fuel gage indicated. For example, the gage may have indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a little more or less than half the fuel tank’s capacity to fill it. • The gage goes back to empty when the ignition is turned off. For a diesel engine, see “Fuel Gage” in the Diesel Engine Supplement[...]
-
Page 239
Driver Information Center (DIC) Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC). The DIC displays information about your vehicle. It also displays warning messages if a system problem is detected. All messages will appear in the DIC display located below the tachometer in the instrument panel cluster. The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short delay, the DIC will display the information that was last displayed before the engine was turned off. If your vehicle has DIC buttons, see “DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC Buttons)” later in this section and DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-76 for the displays available. If your vehicle does not have DIC b[...]
-
Page 240
DIC Buttons The buttons are the trip/fuel, vehicle information, customization, and set/reset buttons. The button functions are detailed in the following pages. 3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to display the odometer, trip odometer, fuel range, average economy, fuel used, timer, and transmission temperature. The compass and outside temperature will also be shown in the display. The temperature will be shown in °F or °C depending on the units selected. T (Vehicle Information): Press this button to display the oil life, units, tire pressure readings for vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS), trailer brake gain and output information for vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Br[...]
-
Page 241
Trip/Fuel Menu Items 3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to scroll through the following menu items: Odometer Press the trip/fuel button until ODOMETER displays. This display shows the distance the vehicle has been driven in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km). Pressing the trip odometer reset stem will also display the odometer. To switch between English and metric measurements, see “Units” later in this section. Trip Odometer Press the trip/fuel button until TRIP displays. This display shows the current distance traveled in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km) since the last reset for the trip odometer. Pressing the trip odometer reset stem will also display the trip odometer. The trip o[...]
-
Page 242
Fuel Range Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL RANGE displays. This display shows the approximate number of remaining miles (mi) or kilometers (km) the vehicle can be driven without refueling. The display will show LOW if the fuel level is low. The fuel range estimate is based on an average of the vehicle’s fuel economy over recent driving history and the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank. This estimate will change if driving conditions change. For example, if driving in traff ic and making frequent stops, this display may read one number, but if the vehicle is driven on a freeway, the number may change even though the same amount of fuel is in the fuel tank. This is because diff[...]
-
Page 243
Transmission Temperature Press the trip/fuel button until TRANS TEMP displays. This display shows the temperature of the automatic transmission fluid in either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C). Blank Display This display shows no information. Vehicle Information Menu Items T (Vehicle Information): Press this button to scroll through the following menu items: Oil Life Press the vehicle information button until OIL LIFE REMAINING displays. This display shows an estimate of the oil’s remaining useful life. If you see 99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on the display, that means 99% of the current oil life remains. The engine oil life system will alert you to change the oil on a schedule[...]
-
Page 244
Tire Pressure If your vehicle has the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS), the pressure for each tire can be viewed in the DIC. The tire pressure will be shown in either pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). Press the vehicle information button until the DIC displays FRONT TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##. Press the vehicle information button again until the DIC displays REAR TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##. If a low or high tire pressure condition is detected by the system while driving, a message advising you to check the pressure in a specific tire will appear in the display. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-73 and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-66 for more inf[...]
-
Page 245
3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on the first transmitter at the same time for about 15 seconds. On vehicles with memory recall seats, the first transmitter learned will match driver 1 and the second will match driver 2. A chime will sound indicating that the transmitter is matched. 4. To match additional transmitters at this time, repeat Step 3. Each vehicle can have a maximum of eight transmitters matched to it. 5. To exit the programming mode, you must cycle the key to LOCK/OFF. Compass Zone Setting This display allows for setting the compass zone. See DIC Compass on page 3-63 for more information. Compass Recalibration This display allows for calibrating the compass. See D[...]
-
Page 246
Trip Odometer Reset Stem Menu Items Odometer Press the trip odometer reset stem until ODOMETER displays. This display shows the distance the vehicle has been driven in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km). Engine Hours To display the ENGINE HOURS, place the ignition in LOCK/OFF or ACC/ACCESSORY, then press and hold the trip odometer reset stem for four seconds while viewing the ODOMETER. This display shows the total number of hours the engine has run. Trip Odometer Press the trip odometer reset stem until TRIP displays. This display shows the current distance traveled in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km) since the last reset for the trip odometer. The trip odometer can be reset to zero by[...]
-
Page 247
Trailer Gain and Output On vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system, the trailer brake display appears in the DIC. Press the trip odometer reset stem until TRAILER GAIN and OUTPUT display. TRAILER GAIN shows the trailer gain setting. This setting can be adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with either a trailer connected or disconnected. To adjust this setting, see “Integrated Trailer Brake Control System” under Towing a Trailer on page 4-50 for more information. OUTPUT shows the power output to the trailer anytime a trailer with electric brakes is connected. Output is displayed in 0 to 10 bars. Dashes may appear in the OUTPUT display. See “Integrated Trailer Brake Control[...]
-
Page 248
Relearn Tire Positions Your vehicle may have this display. To access this display, the vehicle must be in P (Park). If your vehicle has the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS), after rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or sensor, the system must re-learn the tire positions. To re-learn the tire positions, see Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5-75 . See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5-80 and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-66 for more information. Relearn Remote Key To access this display, the vehicle must be in P (Park). This display allows you to match Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters to your vehicle. To match an RKE transmitter to your vehicle: 1. Press the t[...]
-
Page 249
Language This display allows you to select the language in which the DIC messages will appear. To select a language: 1. Press the trip odometer reset stem until ODOMETER displays. 2. While in the ODOMETER display, press and hold the trip odometer reset stem for three seconds until the currently set language displays. 3. Continue to press and hold the trip odometer reset stem to scroll through all of the available languages. The available languages are ENGLISH (default), FRANCAIS (French), ESPANOL (Spanish), and NO CHANGE. 4. Once the desired language is displayed, release the trip odometer reset stem to set your choice. DIC Compass Your vehicle may have a compass in the Driver Information Ce[...]
-
Page 250
To adjust for compass variance, use the following procedure: Compass Variance (Zone) Procedure 1. Do not set the compass zone when the vehicle is moving. Only set it when the vehicle is in P (Park). Press the vehicle information button until PRESS V TO CHANGE COMPASS ZONE displays. Or, if the vehicle does not have DIC buttons, press the trip odometer reset stem until CHANGE COMPASS ZONE displays. 2. Find the vehicle’s current location and variance zone number on the map. Zones 1 through 15 are available. 3. Press the set/reset button to scroll through and select the appropriate variance zone. 3-64[...]
-
Page 251
4. Press the trip/fuel button until the vehicle heading, for example, N for North, is displayed in the DIC. Or, if the vehicle does not have DIC buttons, press and hold the trip odometer reset stem for two seconds to select the next available variance zone. Repeat this step until the appropriate variance zone is displayed. 5. If calibration is necessary, calibrate the compass. See “Compass Calibration Procedure” following. Compass Calibration The compass can be manually calibrated. Only calibrate the compass in a magnetically clean and safe location, such as an open parking lot, where driving the vehicle in circles is not a danger. It is suggested to calibrate away from tall buildings, u[...]
-
Page 252
DIC Warnings and Messages Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the driver that the status of the vehicle has changed and that some action may be needed by the driver to correct the condition. Multiple messages may appear one after another. Some messages may not require immediate action, but you can press any of the DIC buttons on the instrument panel or the trip odometer reset stem on the instrument panel cluster to acknowledge that you received the messages and to clear them from the display. Some messages cannot be cleared from the DIC display because they are more urgent. These messages require action before they can be cleared. You should take any messages that appear on the displ[...]
-
Page 253
Loading the Vehicle on page 4-32 , and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-73 . The DIC also shows the tire pressure values. See “DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC Buttons)” earlier in this section. If the tire pressure is low, the low tire pressure warning light comes on. See Tire Pressure Light on page 3-45 . CHECK TRAILER WIRING On vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system, this message may display and a chime may sound when one of the following conditions exists: • A trailer with electric brakes becomes disconnected from the vehicle. − If the disconnect occurs while the vehicle is stopped, this message clears itself after a short time. − If the discon[...]
-
Page 254
ENGINE HOT A/C (Air Conditioning) TURNED OFF This message displays when the engine coolant becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature. See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage (US-Canada) on page 3-44 . To avoid added strain on a hot engine, the air conditioning compressor automatically turns off. When the coolant temperature returns to normal, the air conditioning compressor turns back on. You can continue to drive your vehicle. If this message continues to appear, have the system repaired by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible to avoid damage to the engine. ENGINE OIL HOT IDLE ENGINE This message displays when the engine oil becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature. S[...]
-
Page 255
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED This message displays and a chime sounds when the cooling system temperature gets too hot and the engine further enters the engine coolant protection mode. See Engine Overheating on page 5-34 for further information. This message also displays when the vehicle’s engine power is reduced. Reduced engine power can affect the vehicle’s ability to accelerate. If this message is on, but there is no reduction in performance, proceed to your destination. The performance may be reduced the next time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven at a reduced speed while this message is on, but acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime this message stays on, the vehi[...]
-
Page 256
ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE WITH CARE This message displays when ice conditions are possible. LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN (Crew Cab) This message displays and a chime sounds if the driver side rear door is not fully closed and the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park). Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door for obstructions, and close the door again. Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC. OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine oil pressure is low, severe engine damage may occur. If a low oil pressure warning appears on the Driver Information Center (DIC), stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Do not drive the vehicle until the cause of the low oil p[...]
-
Page 257
REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY This message displays if a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter battery is low. The battery needs to be replaced in the transmitter. See “Battery Replacement” under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-4 . RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN (Crew Cab) This message displays and a chime sounds if the passenger side rear door is not fully closed and the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park). Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door for obstructions, and close the door again. Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC. SERVICE 4 WHEEL DRIVE This message displays if a problem occurs with the four-wheel-drive system. If this message appears, stop [...]
-
Page 258
SERVICE BRAKES SOON This message displays if there is a problem with the brake system. If this message appears, stop as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle. Restart the vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display. If the message is still displayed or appears again when you begin driving, the brake system needs service. See your dealer/retailer. SERVICE PARK ASSIST If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system, this message displays if there is a problem with the URPA system. Do not use this system to help you park. See Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) on page 2-62 for more information. See your dealer/retailer for service. SERVICE STABILITRAK If you[...]
-
Page 259
SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEM On vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system, this message displays and a chime sounds when there is a problem with the ITBC system. When this message displays, power is no longer available to the trailer brakes. As soon as it is safe to do so, carefully pull your vehicle over to the side of the road and turn the ignition off. Check the wiring connection to the trailer and turn the ignition back on. If this message still displays, either your vehicle or the trailer needs service. See your dealer/retailer. See “Integrated Trailer Brake Control System” under Towing a Trailer on page 4-50 for more information. STABILITRAK OFF If your vehic[...]
-
Page 260
TIGHTEN GAS CAP This message may display along with the check engine light on the instrument panel cluster if the vehicle’s fuel cap is not tightened properly. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-45 . Reinstall the fuel cap fully. See Filling the Tank on page 5-10 . The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn this light and message off. TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE If your vehicle has the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS), this message displays when the system is re-learning the tire positions on your veh[...]
-
Page 261
TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINE Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the transmission fluid is overheating and the transmission temperature warning is displayed on the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, you can damage the transmission. This could lead to costly repairs that would not be covered by your warranty. Do not drive your vehicle with overheated transmission fluid or while the transmission temperature warning is displayed. This message displays along with a sound if the transmission fluid in the vehicle gets hot. Driving with the transmission fluid temperature high can cause damage to the vehicle. Stop the vehicle and let it idle to allow the transmission to cool. This message [...]
-
Page 262
DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) Your vehicle may have customization capabilities that allow you to program certain features to one preferred setting. Customization features can only be programmed to one setting on the vehicle and cannot be programmed to a preferred setting for two different drivers. All of the customization options may not be available on your vehicle. Only the options available will be displayed on the DIC. The default settings for the customization features were set when your vehicle left the factory, but may have been changed from their default state since then. The customization preferences are automatically recalled. To change customization preferences, use[...]
-
Page 263
DISPLAY LANGUAGE This feature allows you to select the language in which the DIC messages will appear. Press the customization button until the DISPLAY LANGUAGE screen appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to access the settings for this feature. Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings: ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear in English. FRANCAIS: All messages will appear in French. ESPANOL: All messages will appear in Spanish. NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. The current setting will remain. To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC. You can also change th[...]
-
Page 264
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK This feature allows you to select whether or not to turn off the automatic door unlocking feature. It also allows you to select which doors and when the doors will automatically unlock. See Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 2-10 for more information. Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to access the settings for this feature. Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings: OFF: None of the doors will automatically unlock. DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the driver’s door will unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition. DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver’s door w[...]
-
Page 265
REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK This feature allows you to select the type of feedback you will receive when unlocking the vehicle with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. You will not receive feedback when unlocking the vehicle with the RKE transmitter if the doors are open. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-4 for more information. Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to access the settings for this feature. Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings: LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps will not flash when you press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter. LIGHTS [...]
-
Page 266
EXIT LIGHTING This feature allows you to select the amount of time you want the exterior lamps to remain on when it is dark enough outside. This happens after the key is turned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF. Press the customization button until EXIT LIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to access the settings for this feature. Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings: OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on. 30 SECONDS (default): The exterior lamps will stay on for 30 seconds. 1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will stay on for one minute. 2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will stay on for two minutes. NO CHANGE: No change will be made to t[...]
-
Page 267
CHIME VOLUME This feature allows you to select the volume level of the chime. Press the customization button until CHIME VOLUME appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to access the settings for this feature. Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings: NORMAL: The chime volume will be set to a normal level. LOUD: The chime volume will be set to a loud level. NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. The current setting will remain. There is no default for chime volume. The volume will stay at the last known setting. To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC. PARK TILT MIRROR[...]
-
Page 268
EASY EXIT RECALL If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select your preference for the automatic easy exit seat feature. See Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals on page 1-8 for more information. Press the customization button until EASY EXIT RECALL appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to access the settings for this feature. Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings: DOOR BUTTON ONLY: No automatic seat exit recall will occur. The recall will only occur after pressing the easy exit seat button. BUTTON & KEY OUT (default): If the features are enabled through the EASY EXIT SETUP menu, the driver’s seat will move back when [...]
-
Page 269
MEMORY SEAT RECALL If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select your preference for the remote memory seat recall feature. See Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals on page 1-8 for more information. Press the customization button until MEMORY SEAT RECALL appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to access the settings for this feature. Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings: OFF (default): No remote memory seat recall will occur. ON: The driver’s seat and, on some vehicles, the outside mirrors will automatically move to the stored driving position when the unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is pressed.[...]
-
Page 270
FACTORY SETTINGS This feature allows you to set all of the customization features back to their factory default settings. Press the customization button until FACTORY SETTINGS appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to access the settings for this feature. Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings: RESTORE ALL (default): The customization features will be set to their factory default settings. DO NOT RESTORE: The customization features will not be set to their factory default settings. To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC. EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS This feature allows you to exit t[...]
-
Page 271
Audio System(s) Determine which radio the vehicle has and read the following pages to become familiar with its features. { CAUTION: Taking your eyes off the road for extended periods could cause a crash resulting in injury or death to you or others. Do not give extended attention to entertainment tasks while driving. This system provides access to many audio and non audio listings. To minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving, do the following while the vehicle is parked: • Become familiar with the operation and controls of the audio system. • Set up the tone, speaker adjustments, and preset radio stations. For more information, see Defensive Driving on page 4-2 . Notice: Cont[...]
-
Page 272
Setting the Clock AM-FM Radio with Optional CD Player If the vehicle has an AM/FM radio with an optional CD player, it has a H (clock) button for setting the time. With these types of radios, the clock can be set with either the radio turned on or off. To set the clock: 1. Press the H button until the hour numbers begin flashing on the display. Press the H button a second time and the minute numbers begin flashing on the display. Press the H button a third time and the 12HR or 24HR time format begins flashing. 2. While either the hour or the minute numbers are flashing, turn the f knob, located on the upper right side of the radio faceplate, clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or d[...]
-
Page 273
Changing the Time and Date Default Settings To change the time default setting from 12 hours to 24 hours or change the date default setting from month/day/year to day/month/year. To change the time or date default settings: 1. Press the H button and then the pushbutton located under the forward arrow that is currently displayed on the radio screen until the time 12H (hour) and 24H (hour), and the date MM/DD (month and day) and DD/MM (day and month) are displayed. 2. Press the pushbutton located under the desired option. 3. Press the H button again to apply the selected default, or let the screen time out. MP3 Radio with a Six-Disc CD Player If the vehicle has a radio with a six-disc CD playe[...]
-
Page 274
Changing the Time and Date Default Settings To change the time default setting from 12 hours to 24 hours or change the date default setting from month/day/year to day/month/year. To change the time or date default settings: 1. Press the MENU button. Once the H option displays, press the pushbutton located under the forward arrow that is currently displayed on the radio screen until the 12H (hour) and 24H (hour), and the date MM/DD (month and day) and DD/MM (day and month) displays. 2. Press the pushbutton located under the desired option. 3. Press the MENU button again to apply the selected default, or let the screen time out. Radio(s) AM-FM Radio 3-88[...]
-
Page 275
The vehicle has one of these radios as its audio system. Radio with CD (MP3) shown, Radio with Six-Disc CD (MP3) similar Radio with CD and DVD (MP3) 3-89[...]
-
Page 276
Radios with CD and DVD Radios with CD and DVD have a Bose ® Surround Sound System. Some of its features are explained later in this section under, “Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)”. If the vehicle has a Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) system, it has a CD/DVD radio. See Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-129 for more information on the vehicle’s RSE system. The DVD player is the top slot on the radio faceplate. The player is capable of reading the DTS programmed DVD Audio or DVD Video media, (DTS and DTS Digital Surround are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.). Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trad[...]
-
Page 277
H (Clock) (AM-FM Radio): The radio may have a clock button for setting the time. With this type of radio, the clock can be set with either the radio turned on or off. See Setting the Clock on page 3-86 for more information. Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): Radios with Speed Compensated Volume (SCV) automatically adjusts the radio volume to compensate for road and wind noise as the vehicle’s speed changes while driving, so that the volume level stays consistent. To activate SCV: 1. Set the radio volume to the desired level. 2. Press the MENU button to display the radio setup menu. 3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO VOLUM (automatic volume) label on the radio display. 4. Press the pushbut[...]
-
Page 278
4 (Information) (XM Satellite Radio Service, MP3, and RDS Features): Press to switch the display between the radio station frequency and the time. When the ignition is in the OFF position, press 4 to display the time. For vehicles with XM, MP3, WMA or RDS features, press 4 to display additional text information related to the current FM-RDS or XM station; or CD, MP3 or WMA song. If information is available during XM, CD, MP3 or WMA playback, the song title information displays on the top line of the display and artist information displays on the bottom line. When information is not available, “NO INFO” displays. Setting Preset Stations (AM-FM Radio) If the radio does not have XM, up to 1[...]
-
Page 279
The number of favorites pages can be setup using the MENU button. To setup the number of favorites pages: 1. Press the MENU button to display the radio setup menu. 2. Press the pushbutton located below the FAV 1-6 label. 3. Select the desired number of favorites pages by pressing the pushbutton located below the displayed page numbers. 4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu time out, to return to the original main radio screen showing the radio station frequency labels and to begin the process of programming favorites for the chosen amount of numbered pages. Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble) (AM-FM Radio) Bass/Treble: To adjust the bass or treble, press the tune knob or the EQ button until th[...]
-
Page 280
EQ (Equalization): Press this button to choose bass and treble equalization settings designed for different types of music. The choices are pop, rock, country, talk, jazz, and classical. Selecting MANUAL or changing bass or treble, returns the EQ to the manual bass and treble settings. Unique EQ settings can be saved for each source. If the radio has a Bose ® audio system, the EQ settings are either MANUAL or TALK. Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) (AM-FM Radio) ` (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balance or fade, press this button or the tune knob until the desired speaker control label displays. Turn the tune knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the setting. The setting can also b[...]
-
Page 281
Finding a Category (CAT) Station CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to find XM stations when the radio is in the XM mode. To find XM channels within a desired category: 1. Press the BAND button until the XM frequency displays. Press the CAT button to display the category labels. Continue pressing the CAT button until the desired category name displays. • Radios with CD and DVD can also navigate the category list by pressing the FWD or the s REV button. 2. Press either of the two buttons below the desired category label to immediately tune to the first XM station associated with that category. 3. Turn the f knob, press the buttons below the right or left arrows displayed, or press [...]
-
Page 282
Radio Messages Calibration Error: The audio system has been calibrated for the vehicle from the factory. If Calibration Error displays, it means that the radio has not been configured properly for the vehicle and it must be returned to your dealer/retailer for service. Locked or Loc: One of these messages will display when the THEFTLOCK ® system has locked up the radio. Take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service. If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. XM™ Satellite Radio Service XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the 48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces. XM Satellite Radio has a wide variet[...]
-
Page 283
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the player it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio is turned on, the CD starts to play where it stopped, if it was the last selected audio source. When the CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays. As each new track starts to play, the track number displays. The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner. Playing a CD (In Either the DVD or CD Slot) Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing (loading a disc into the system, depending on media type and format ranges from 5 to[...]
-
Page 284
Care of the CD and DVD Player Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the CD or DVD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD with a marking pen instead. The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised, due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with lubricants internal to the CD and DVD player mechanism. Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than one CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs, the CD player could be damaged. While using the CD player, use only CDs in good condition without any label, load one CD at a t[...]
-
Page 285
FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance playback quickly within a track. Sound will be heard at a reduced volume. Release to resume playing the track. The elapsed time of the track displays. RDM (Random): With the random setting, the tracks can be listened to in random, rather than sequential order. To use random, do one of the following: • Press the CD/AUX button, or for a single CD player, insert a disc partway into the slot of the CD player. A RDM label displays. To play the tracks from the single CD in random order, press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM label until Random Current Disc displays. Press the pushbutton again to turn off random play. • Press the CD/AUX but[...]
-
Page 286
DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to cycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening to the radio. The DVD/CD text label and a message showing the track or chapter number displays when a disc is in either slot. Press this button again and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input device, such as a portable audio player. If a portable audio player is not connected, “No Aux Input Device” displays. If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot the DVD/CD AUX button cycles between the two sources and not indicate “No Aux Input Device”. If a front auxiliary device is connected, the DVD/CD AUX button cycles through all available options, such as: DVD slot, CD [...]
-
Page 287
Playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc Radios with a Single CD player or a Six-Disc CD player has the capability of playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW disc. For more information on how to play an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW disc, see “Using an MP3” in the index. Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW Disc Radios with CD and DVD has the capability of playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW disc. For more information on how to play an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW disc, see “Using an MP3” in the index. CD Messages CHECK DISC: Radios with a Single CD player or radios with a Six-Disc player displays CHECK DISC and/or ejects the CD if an error occurs. Radios with a CD and DVD player may display other messages when an error occurs[...]
-
Page 288
Using the DVD Player The DVD player is controlled by the buttons on the remote control, or by the RSA system, or by the buttons on the radio faceplate. See “Remote Control”, under Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-129 and Rear Seat Audio (RSA) on page 3-138 for more information. The DVD player is only compatible with DVDs of the appropriate region code that is printed on the jacket of most DVDs. The DVD slot of the radio is compatible with most audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW media along with MP3 and WMA formats. If an error message displays on the video screen or the radio, see “DVD Display Error Messages” under, Rear Seat Entertainment [...]
-
Page 289
control feature. Parental control prevents the rear seat occupant from operating the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) system or remote control. A lock symbol displays next to the clock display. The parental control feature remains on until the knob is pressed and held for more than two seconds again, or until the driver turns the ignition off and exits the vehicle. f (Tune): Turn to change tracks on a CD or DVD, to manually tune a radio station, or to change clock or date settings, while in the clock or date setting mode. See the information given earlier in this section specific to the radio, CD, and the DVD. Also, see “Setting the Time” in the index, for setting the clock and date. © SEEK (Prev[...]
-
Page 290
DVD-V (Video) Display Buttons Once a DVD-V is inserted, the radio display menu shows several tag options for DVD playing. Press the pushbuttons located under any desired tag option during DVD playback. See the tag options listed after, for more information. The rear seat passenger can navigate the DVD-V menus and controls through the remote control. See “Remote Control”, under Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-129 for more information. The Video Screen automatically turns on when the DVD-V is inserted into the DVD slot. r / j (Play/Pause): Press either the play or pause icon displayed on the radio system, to toggle between pausing or restarting playback of a DVD. If the forw[...]
-
Page 291
DVD-A (Audio) Display Buttons Once a DVD-A is inserted, radio display menu shows several tag options for DVD playing. Press the pushbuttons located under any desired tag option during DVD playback. See the tag options listed after, for more information. The rear seat operator can navigate the DVD-A menus and controls through the remote control. See “Remote Control”, under Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-129 for more information. The Video Screen does not automatically power on when the DVD-A is inserted into the DVD slot. It must be manually turned on by the rear seat occupant through the remote control power button. r / j (Play/Pause): Press either the play or pause icon [...]
-
Page 292
Stopping and Resuming Playback To stop playing a DVD without turning off the system, press the c button on the remote control, or press the pushbutton located under the stop or the play/pause symbol tags displayed on the radio. If the radio head is sourced to something other than DVD-V, press the DVD/CD AUX button to make DVD-V the active source. To resume DVD playback, press the r / j button on the remote control, or press the pushbutton located under the play/pause symbol tag displayed on the radio. The DVD should resume play from where it last stopped if the disc has not been ejected and the stop button has not been pressed twice on the remote control. If the disc has been ejected or the [...]
-
Page 293
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack The radio system has an auxiliary input jack located on the lower right side of the faceplate. This is not an audio output; do not plug the headphone set into the front auxiliary input jack. An external audio device such as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3 player, CD player, etc. can be connected to the auxiliary input jack for use as another source for audio listening. Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device while the vehicle is in P (Park). See Defensive Driving on page 4-2 for more information on driver distraction. To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary input jack. When a device is conne[...]
-
Page 294
Using an MP3 (Radio with CD or Six-Disc CD Player) MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc The radio plays MP3 files that were recorded on a CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can be recorded with the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps, 56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps, 128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbps or a variable bit rate. Song title, artist name, and album are available for display by the radio when recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2. Compressed Audio The radio also plays discs that contain both uncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and MP3 files. By default the radio shows the MP3 label on the left side of the screen but plays both file formats in th[...]
-
Page 295
Playlists can be changed by using the S c (previous) and c T (next) folder buttons, the f knob, or the © SEEK ¨ arrows. MP3 CD-R or CD-RW that have been recorded without using file folders can be played. If a CD-R or CD-RW contains more than the maximum of 50 folders, 15 playlists, and 512 folders and files, the player allows access and navigates up to the maximum, but all items over the maximum are not accessible. Root Directory The root directory of the CD-R or CD-RW is treated as a folder. If the root directory has compressed audio files, the directory displays as the CD label. All files contained directly under the root directory are accessed prior to any root directory folders. Ho[...]
-
Page 296
File System and Naming The song name that displays is the song name that is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not present in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file name without the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name. Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages are shortened. Parts of words on the last page of text and the extension of the filename does not display. Preprogrammed Playlists Preprogrammed playlists that were created using WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software can be accessed, however, they cannot be edited using the radio. These playlists are treated as special folders containing compressed audio song files. Playing an MP3 I[...]
-
Page 297
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to reverse playback quickly within an MP3 file. Sound will be heard at a reduced volume. Release this button to resume playing the file. The elapsed time of the file displays. FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this button to advance playback quickly within an MP3 file. Sound will be heard at a reduced volume. Release this button to resume playing the file. The elapsed time of the file displays. RDM (Random): With the random setting, MP3 files on the CD-R or CD-RW can be listened to in random, rather than sequential order, on one CD-R or CD-RW or all discs in a six-disc CD player. To use random, do one of the following: 1. To play MP3 fil[...]
-
Page 298
To change from playback by artist to playback by album, press the pushbutton located below the Sort By label. From the sort screen, push one of the buttons below the album button. Press the pushbutton below the back label to return to the main music navigator screen. Now the album name is displayed on the second line between the arrows and songs from the current album begins to play. Once all songs from that album are played, the player moves to the next album in alphabetical order on the CD-R or CD-RW and begins playing MP3 files from that album. To exit music navigator mode, press the pushbutton below the Back label to return to normal MP3 playback. BAND: Press this button to listen to th[...]
-
Page 299
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find songs while driving. Organize songs by albums using one folder for each album. Each folder or album should contain 18 songs or less. • Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to eight subfolders deep, however, keep the total number of folders to a minimum in order to reduce the complexity and confusion in trying to locate a particular folder during playback. • Make sure playlists have a .m3u extension as other file extensions might not work. • Minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlist names. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or a combination of a large number of files and folders, or playlists could cause [...]
-
Page 300
Order of Play Tracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW are played in the following order: • Play begins from the first track in the first playlist and continues sequentially through all tracks in each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist has played, play continues from the first track of the first playlist. • Play begins from the first track in the first folder and continues sequentially through all tracks in each folder. When the last track of the last folder has played, play continues from the first track of the first folder. When play enters a new folder, the display does not automatically show the new folder name unless folder mode has been chosen as the default dis[...]
-
Page 301
Z CD (Eject): Press and release this button to eject the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently playing in the bottom slot. A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected, Remove Disc displays. The CD-R or CD-RW can be removed. If the CD-R or CD-RW is not removed, after several seconds, the CD-R or CD-RW automatically pulls back into the player. If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed, such as unknown format, etc., and the disc fails to eject, press and hold this button for more than five seconds to force the disc to eject. Z DVD (Eject): Press and release this button to eject the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently playing in the top slot. A beep sounds and Ejecting Dis[...]
-
Page 302
RDM (Random): With the random setting, MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or CD-RW can be listened to in random, rather than sequential order. To play MP3/WMA files from the CD-R or CD-RW in random order, press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM label until Random Current Disc displays. Press the same pushbutton again to turn off random play. h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigator feature to play MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or CD-RW in order by artist or album. Press the pushbutton located below the music navigator label. The player scans the disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3 tag information. It could take several minutes to scan the disc depending on the number of MP3/WMA ?[...]
-
Page 303
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a CD or a DVD is playing. The CD or DVD remains inside the radio for future listening or viewing entertainment. DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to cycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening to the radio. The DVD/CD text label and a message showing track or chapter number displays when a disc is in either slot. Press this button again and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input device, such as a portable audio player. If a portable audio player is not connected, “No Aux Input Device” displays. If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot the DVD/CD AUX button cycles between the two sources and not [...]
-
Page 304
No Title Info: No song title information is available at this time on this channel. The system is working properly. No CAT Info: No category information is available at this time on this channel. The system is working properly. No Information: No text or informational messages are available at this time on this channel. The system is working properly. CAT Not Found: There are no channels available for the selected category. The system is working properly. XM Theftlocked: The XM receiver in the vehicle could have previously been in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this message is received after having the vehicle serviced, check with [...]
-
Page 305
Audio System When using the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, sound comes through the vehicle’s front audio system speakers and overrides the audio system. Use the audio system volume knob, during a call, to change the volume level. The adjusted volume level remains in memory for later calls. To prevent missed calls, a minimum volume level is used if the volume is turned down too low. Bluetooth Controls Use the buttons located on the steering wheel to operate the in-vehicle Bluetooth system. See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-140 for more information. b g (Push To Talk): Press to answer incoming calls, to confirm system information, and to start speech recognition. c x (Phone On Hook)[...]
-
Page 306
Pairing a Phone 1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system responds with “Ready” followed by a tone. 2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with “Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone. 3. Say “Pair”. The system responds with instructions and a four digit PIN number. The PIN number will be used in Step 4. 4. Start the Pairing process on the cell phone that will be paired to the vehicle. Reference the cell phone manufacturers user guide for information on this process. Locate the device named “General Motors” in the list on the cellular phone and follow the instructions on the cell phone to enter the four digit PIN number that was provided in Step 3. 5. The system pro[...]
-
Page 307
Linking to a Dif ferent Phone 1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system responds with “Ready” followed by a tone. 2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with “Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone. 3. Say “Change phone”. The system responds with “Please wait while I search for other phones”. • If another phone is found, the response will be “<Phone name> is now connected”. • If another phone is not found, the original phone remains connected. Storing Name Tags The system can store up to thirty phone numbers as name tags that are shared between the Bluetooth and OnStar systems. The system uses the following commands to store and retrieve phone numbers:[...]
-
Page 308
5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name tag is recorded and the system responds with “About to store <name tag>. Does that sound OK?”. • If the name tag does not sound correct, say “No” and repeat Step 5. • If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and the name tag is stored. After the number is stored the system returns to the main menu. Using the Digit Store Command The digit store command allows a phone number to be stored by entering the digits individually. 1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system responds with “Ready” followed by a tone. 2. Say “Digit Store”. The system responds with “Please say the first digit to store” followed by [...]
-
Page 309
Deleting Name Tags The system uses the following commands to delete name tags: • Delete • Delete all name tags Using the Delete Command The delete command allows specific name tags to be deleted. To use the delete command: 1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system responds with “Ready” followed by a tone. 2. Say “Delete”. The system responds with “Delete, please say the name tag” followed by a tone. 3. Say the name tag to be deleted. The system responds with “Would you like to delete, <name tag>? Please say yes or no”. • If the name tag is correct, say “Yes” to delete the name tag. The system responds with “OK, deleting <name tag>, returning t[...]
-
Page 310
Using the Dial Command 1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system responds with “Ready” followed by a tone. 2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Dial using <phone name>”. “Number please” followed by a tone. 3. Say the entire number without pausing. • If the system recognizes the number, it responds with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number. • If the system does not recognize the number, it confirms the numbers followed by a tone. If the number is correct, say “Yes”. The system responds with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number. If the number is not correct, say “No”. The system will ask for the number to be re-entered. Using the Digit Dial Co[...]
-
Page 311
3. Say the name tag of the person to call. • If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it responds with “OK, calling, <name tag>” and dials the number. • If the system is unsure it recognizes the right name tag, it confirms the name tag followed by a tone. If the name tag is correct, say “Yes”. The system responds with “OK, calling, <name tag>” and dials the number. If the name tag is not correct, say “No”. The system will ask for the name tag to be re-entered. Once connected, the person called will be heard through the audio speakers. Using the Re-dial Command 1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.[...]
-
Page 312
Three-Way Calling Three-Way Calling must be supported on the Bluetooth phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier to work. 1. While on a call press b g . The system responds with “Ready” followed by a tone. 2. Say “Three-way call”. The system responds with “Three-way call, please say dial or call”. 3. Use the dial or call command to dial the number of the third party to be called. 4. Once the call is connected, press b g to link all the callers together. Ending a Call Press c x to end a call. Muting a Call During a call, all sounds from inside the vehicle can be muted so that the person on the other end of the call cannot hear them. To Mute a call 1. Press b g . The system[...]
-
Page 313
To Transfer Audio to the In-Vehicle Bluetooth System The cellular phone must be paired and connected with the Bluetooth system before a call can be transferred. The connection process can take up to two minutes after the key is turned to the ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY position. During a call with the audio on the cell phone, press b g for more than two seconds. The audio switches from the cell phone to the vehicle. Voice Pass-Thru Voice Pass-Thru allows access to the voice recognition commands on the cell phone. See the cell phone manufacturers user guide to see if the cell phone supports this feature. This feature can be used to verbally access contacts stored in the cell phone. 1. Press and h[...]
-
Page 314
Sending a Stored Name Tag During a Call 1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready” followed by a tone. 2. Say “Send name tag.” The system responds with “Say a name tag to send tones” followed by a tone. 3. Say the name tag to send. • If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it responds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” and the dial tones are sent and the call continues. • If the system is not sure it recognized the name tag properly, it responds “Dial <name tag>, Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone. If the name tag is correct, say “Yes”. The system responds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” and the dial tones are sent and the call con[...]
-
Page 315
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System The vehicle may have a DVD Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) system. The RSE system works with the vehicle’s audio system. The DVD player is part of the front radio. The RSE system includes a radio with a DVD player, a video display screen, audio/video jacks, two wireless headphones, and a remote control. See Radio(s) on page 3-88 for more information on the vehicle’s audio/DVD system. Before Driving The RSE is designed for rear seat passengers only. The driver cannot safely view the video screen while driving and should not try to do so. In severe or extreme weather conditions the RSE system might not work until the temperature is within the operating ra[...]
-
Page 316
Headphones The RSE includes two 2-channel wireless headphones that are dedicated to this system. Channel 1 is dedicated to the video screen, while Channel 2 is dedicated to RSA selections. These headphones can used to listen to the radio, CDs, DVDs, MP3s, DVDAs, any auxiliary source connected to A/V jacks, or the auxiliary input jack, if the vehicle has this feature. The wireless headphones have an On/Off button, channel 1/2 switch, and a volume control. Push the power button to turn on the headphones. An indicator light located on the headphones comes on. If the light comes on but, there is intermittent sound and/or static on the headphones, or if the indicator light does not come on, the b[...]
-
Page 317
Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat or direct sunlight. This could damage the headphones and repairs will not be covered by the warranty. Storage in extreme cold can weaken the batteries. Keep the headphones stored in a cool, dry place. If the foam ear pads attached to the headphones become worn or damaged, the pads can be replaced separately from the headphone set. Refer to your dealer/retailer for more information. Battery Replacement To change the batteries on the headphones, do the following: 1. Turn the screw to loosen the battery door located on the left side of the headphones. Slide the battery door open. 2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment. Make sure that they are[...]
-
Page 318
To use the auxiliary inputs of the RSE system, connect an external auxiliary device to the color-coded A/V jacks and turn both the auxiliary device and the video screen power on. If the video screen is in the DVD player mode, pressing the AUX (auxiliary) button on the remote control switches the video screen from the DVD player mode to the auxiliary device. The radio can listen to the audio of the connected auxiliary device by sourcing to auxiliary. See Radio(s) on page 3-88 for more information. How to Change the RSE Video Screen Settings The screen display mode (normal, full, and zoom), screen brightness, and setup menu language can be changed from the on screen setup menu. To change any f[...]
-
Page 319
Video Screen The video screen is located in the overhead console. To use the video screen, do the following: 1. Push the release button located on the overhead console. 2. Move the screen to the desired position. When the video screen is not in use, push it up into its locked position. If a DVD is playing and the screen is raised to its locked position, the screen remains on. This is normal, and the DVD continues to play through the previous audio source. Use the remote control power button or eject the disc to turn off the screen. The overhead console contains the infrared transmitters for the wireless headphones and the infrared receivers for the remote control. They are located at the rea[...]
-
Page 320
Remote Control Buttons O (Power): Press this button to turn the video screen on and off. P (Illumination): Press this button to turn the remote control backlight on. The backlight automatically times out after seven to ten seconds if no other button is pressed while the backlight is on. v (Title): Press this button to return the DVD to the main menu of the DVD. This function could vary for each disc. y (Main Menu): Press this button to access the DVD menu. The DVD menu is different on every DVD. Use the navigation arrows to move the cursor around the DVD menu. After making a selection press the enter button. This button only operates when using a DVD. n , q , p , o (Menu Navigation Arrows): [...]
-
Page 321
in a slow play mode. Also, reverse can be played slowly by pressing the play/pause button and then pressing the fast reverse button. To cancel slow play mode, press the play/pause button. t (Previous Track/Chapter): Press this button to return to the start of the current track or chapter. Press this button again to go to the previous track or chapter. This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews. u (Next Track/Chapter): Press this button to go to the beginning of the next chapter or track. This button might not work while the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews. r (Fast Reverse): Press this button to quickly reverse the DVD[...]
-
Page 322
Battery Replacement To change the remote control batteries, do the following: 1. Slide the rear cover back on the remote control. 2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment. Make sure they are installed correctly using the diagram on the inside of the remote control. 3. Replace the battery cover. If the remote control is to be stored for a long period of time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool, dry place. Problem Recommended Action No power. The ignition might not be turned ON/RUN or in ACC/ACCESSORY. The picture does not fill the screen. There are black borders on the top and bottom or on both sides or it looks stretched out. Check the display mode settings in the setup men[...]
-
Page 323
Problem Recommended Action Sometimes the wireless headphone audio cuts out or buzzes. Check for obstructions, low batteries, reception range, and interference from cellular telephone towers or by using a cellular telephone in the vehicle. Check that the headphones are on correctly using the L (left) and R (right) on the headphones. I lost the remote and/or the headphones. See your dealer/retailer for assistance. The DVD is playing, but there is no picture or sound. Check that the RSE video screen is sourced to the DVD player. DVD Display Error Messages The DVD display error message depends on the radio that is in the vehicle. The video screen can display one of the following: Disc Load/Eject[...]
-
Page 324
DVD Distortion Video distortion can occur when operating cellular phones, scanners, CB radios, Global Position Systems (GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax, or walkie talkies. It might be necessary to turn off the DVD player when operating one of these devices in or near the vehicle. *Excludes the OnStar ® System. Cleaning the RSE Overhead Console When cleaning the RSE overhead console surface, use only a clean cloth dampened with clean water. Cleaning the Video Screen When cleaning the video screen, use only a clean cloth dampened with clean water. Use care when directly touching or cleaning the screen, as damage could result. Rear Seat Audio (RSA) Vehicles with this feature allow the rear s[...]
-
Page 325
P (Power): Press this button to turn the RSA on or off. Volume: Turn the volume knob to increase or to decrease the volume of the wired headphones. The left knob controls the left headphones and the right knob controls the right headphones. SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between the radio (AM/FM), XM™ (if equipped), CD, and if the vehicle has these features, DVD, front auxiliary, and rear auxiliary. ©¨ (Seek): When listening to FM, AM, or XM™ (if equipped), press the seek arrows to go to the previous or to the next station or channels and stay there. This function is inactive, with some radios, if the front seat passengers are listening to the radio. Press and hold either s[...]
-
Page 326
While a DVD video menu is being displayed, press either seek arrow to perform a cursor up or down on the menu. Hold either seek arrow to perform a cursor left or right on the menu. PROG (Program): Press this button to go to the next preset radio station or channel set on the main radio. This function is inactive, with some radios, if the front seat passengers are listening to the radio. While a CD or DVD audio disc is playing, press this button to go to the beginning of the CD or DVD audio. This function is inactive, with some radios, if the front seat passengers are listening to the CD or DVD audio. While a disc is playing in the CD or DVD changer, press this button to select the next disc,[...]
-
Page 327
b g (Mute/Push to Talk): Press to silence the vehicle speakers only. Press again to turn the sound on. For vehicles with OnStar ® or Bluetooth ® systems press and hold b g for longer than two seconds to interact with those systems. See OnStar ® System on page 2-71 and Bluetooth ® on page 3-118 in this manual for more information. SRCE (Source/Voice Recognition): Press to switch between the radio (AM, FM, XM), CD, DVD (if equipped), front auxiliary (if equipped), and rear auxiliary (if equipped). For vehicles with the navigation system, press and hold this button for longer than one second to initiate voice recognition. See “Voice Recognition” in the Navigation System manual for more [...]
-
Page 328
XM™ Satellite Radio Service XM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous United States, and in Canada. Just as with FM, tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out. In addition, traveling or standing under heavy foliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause loss of the XM signal for a period of time. Cellular Phone Usage Cellular phone usage may cause interference with the vehicle’s radio. This interference may occur when making or receiving phone calls, charging the phone’s battery, or simply having the phone on. This interference causes an increased level of static whil[...]
-
Page 329
Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle ........... .4-2 Driving for Better Fuel Economy ...................... .4-2 Defensive Driving .......................................... .4-2 Drunk Driving ................................................ .4-3 Control of a Vehicle ....................................... .4-4 Braking ........................................................ .4-4 Antilock Brake System (ABS) .......................... .4-5 Braking in Emergencies .................................. .4-6 StabiliTrak ® System ....................................... .4-6 Locking Rear Axle ......................................... .4-9 Steering .................................................[...]
-
Page 330
Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle Driving for Better Fuel Economy Driving habits can affect fuel mileage. Here are some driving tips to get the best fuel economy possible. • Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly. • Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops. • Avoid idling the engine for long periods of time. • When road and weather conditions are appropriate, use cruise control, if equipped. • Always follow posted speed limits or drive more slowly when conditions require. • Keep vehicle tires properly inflated. • Combine several trips into a single trip. • Replace the vehicle’s tires with the same TPC Spec number molded into the tire’s sidewall near the size. • [...]
-
Page 331
Drunk Driving { CAUTION: Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking. Do not drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you are with a group, designate a driver who will not drink. Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is a global tragedy. Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and attentiveness. Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor vehicle-related deaths inv[...]
-
Page 332
Control of a Vehicle The following three systems help to control the vehicle while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator. At times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires and road can provide. Meaning, you can lose control of the vehicle. See StabiliTrak ® System on page 4-6 . Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect vehicle performance. See Accessories and Modifications on page 5-4 . Braking See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-42 . Braking action involves perception time and reaction time. Deciding to push the brake pedal is perception time. Actually doing it is reaction time. Average reaction time is about [...]
-
Page 333
Antilock Brake System (ABS) This vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS), an advanced electronic braking system that helps prevent a braking skid. When the engine is started and the vehicle begins to drive away, ABS checks itself. A momentary motor or clicking noise might be heard while this test is going on. This is normal. If there is a problem with ABS, this warning light stays on. See Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light on page 3-43 . Along with ABS, the vehicle has a Dynamic Rear Proportioning (DRP) system. If there is a DRP problem, both the brake and ABS warning lights come on accompanied by a 10-second chime. The lights and chime will come on each time the ignition is turne[...]
-
Page 334
Braking in Emergencies ABS allows the driver to steer and brake at the same time. In many emergencies, steering can help more than even the very best braking. Brake Assist (Except With 4.3L V6 Engine) If this vehicle has StabiliTrak ® , it also has a Brake Assist feature designed to assist the driver in stopping or decreasing vehicle speed in emergency driving conditions. This feature uses the stability system hydraulic brake control module to supplement the power brake system under conditions where the driver has quickly and forcefully applied the brake pedal in an attempt to quickly stop or slow down the vehicle. The stability system hydraulic brake control module increases brake pressure[...]
-
Page 335
If cruise control is being used when StabiliTrak activates, the cruise control automatically disengages. The cruise control can be re-engaged when road conditions allow. See Cruise Control on page 3-13 for more information. If the system fails to turn on or activate, the StabiliTrak light along with one of the following messages will be displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC): TRACTION CONTROL OFF, SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL, STABILITRAK OFF, SERVICE STABILITRAK. If these DIC messages appear, make sure the StabiliTrak system has not been turned off using the StabiliTrak on/of f button. Then turn the steering wheel clockwise from the nine o’clock position to the three o’clock posit[...]
-
Page 336
TCS and StabiliTrak can be turned on by pressing and releasing the StabiliTrak button if not automatically shut off for any other reason. When TCS or StabiliTrak is turned off, the StabiliTrak light and the appropriate message will be displayed on the DIC to warn the driver. The vehicle will still have brake-traction control when traction control is off, but will not be able to use the engine speed management system. See “Traction Control Operation” next for more information. When the traction control system has been turned off, system noises may still be heard as a result of the brake-traction control coming on. It is recommended to leave the system on for normal driving conditions, but[...]
-
Page 337
The traction control system may activate on dry or rough roads or under conditions such as heavy acceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts/downshifts of the transmission. When this happens, a reduction in acceleration may be noticed, or a noise or vibration may be heard. This is normal. If cruise control is being used when the system activates, the StabiliTrak light will flash and cruise control will automatically disengage. Cruise control may be reengaged when road conditions allow. See Cruise Control on page 3-13 . StabiliTrak may also turn off automatically if it determines that a problem exists with the system. If the problem does not clear itself after restarting the vehicle, see y[...]
-
Page 338
Steering in Emergencies There are times when steering can be more effective than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked cars and stops right in front of you. These problems can be avoided by braking — if you can stop in time. But sometimes you cannot stop in time because there is no room. That is the time for evasive action — steering around the problem. The vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like these. First, apply the brakes. See Braking on page 4-4 . It is better to remove as much speed as possible from a collision. Then steer around the problem, to[...]
-
Page 339
Of f-Road Recovery The vehicle’s right wheels can drop off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while driving. If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer so that the vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement. Turn the steering wheel 3 to 5 inches, 8 to 13 cm, (about one-eighth turn) until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge. Then turn the steering wheel to go straight down the roadway. Passing Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing: • Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads[...]
-
Page 340
Skidding In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving those conditions. But skids are always possible. The three types of skids correspond to the vehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin. Remember: StabiliTrak ® helps avoid only the acceleration skid. See StabiliTrak ® System on page 4-6 . If the StabiliTrak ® System is off, th[...]
-
Page 341
Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any road and this is certainly true for off-road driving. At the very time you need special alertness and driving skills, your reflexes, perceptions, and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You could have a serious — or even fatal — accident if you drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking. Off-roading can be great fun but has some definite hazards. The greatest of these is the terrain itself. When off-road driving, traf fic lanes are not marked, curves are not banked, and there are no road signs. Surfaces can be slippery, rough, uphill, or downhill. Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers. Failure t[...]
-
Page 342
If you think you will need some more ground clearance at the front of your vehicle, you can remove the front fascia lower air dam. The air dam is held in place by two bolts and 10 snaps accessible from underneath the front fascia. To remove the air dam: 1. Remove the two outboard air dam bolts. 2. With a flat-blade tool, disengage the snaps. 3. After the bolts are removed and the snaps are disengaged, push forward on the air dam until it is free. Notice: Operating your vehicle for extended periods without the front fascia lower air dam installed can cause improper air flow to the engine. Always be sure to replace the front fascia air dam when you are finished off-road driving. After off-r[...]
-
Page 343
There are some important things to remember about how to load your vehicle. • The heaviest things should be on the floor, forward of the rear axle. Put heavier items as far forward as you can. • Be sure the load is properly secured, so things are not tossed around. You will find other important information under Loading the Vehicle on page 4-32 and Tires on page 5-64 . Environmental Concerns Off-road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying recreation. However, it also raises environmental concerns. We recognize these concerns and urge every off-roader to follow these basic rules for protecting the environment: • Always use established trails, roads, and areas that have been spec[...]
-
Page 344
Getting Familiar with Of f-Road Driving It is a good idea to practice in an area that is safe and close to home before you go into the wilderness. Off-roading requires some new and dif ferent skills. Tune your senses to different kinds of signals. Your eyes need to constantly sweep the terrain for unexpected obstacles. Your ears need to listen for unusual tire or engine sounds. Use your arms, hands, feet, and body to respond to vibrations and vehicle bounce. Controlling the vehicle is the key to successful off-road driving. One of the best ways to control the vehicle is to control the speed. At higher speeds: • You approach things faster and have less time to react. • There is less time [...]
-
Page 345
Surface Obstacles: Unseen or hidden obstacles can be hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut, or bump can startle you if you are not prepared for them. Often these obstacles are hidden by grass, bushes, snow, or even the rise and fall of the terrain itself. Some things to consider: • Is the path ahead clear? • Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead? • Does the travel take you uphill or downhill? • Will you have to stop suddenly or change direction quickly? When driving over obstacles or rough terrain, keep a firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs, or other surface features can jerk the wheel out of your hands. When driving over bumps, rocks, or other obstacles, the whee[...]
-
Page 346
Approaching a Hill When you approach a hill, decide if it is too steep to climb, descend, or cross. Steepness can be hard to judge. On a very small hill, for example, there may be a smooth, constant incline with only a small change in elevation where you can easily see all the way to the top. On a large hill, the incline may get steeper as you near the top, but you might not see this because the crest of the hill is hidden by bushes, grass, or shrubs. Consider this as you approach a hill: • Is there a constant incline, or does the hill get sharply steeper in places? • Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the surface cause tire slipping? • Is there a straight path up or down [...]
-
Page 347
• Attach a flag to the vehicle to be more visible to approaching traff ic on trails or hills. • Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill to let opposing traff ic know you are there. • Use headlamps even during the day to make the vehicle more visible to oncoming traff ic. { CAUTION: Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at full speed can cause an accident. There could be a drop-off, embankment, cliff, or even another vehicle. You could be seriously injured or killed. As you near the top of a hill, slow down and stay alert. If the vehicle stalls, or is about to stall, and you cannot make it up the hill: • Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep it from rolling back[...]
-
Page 348
Things not to do if the vehicle stalls, or is about to stall, when going up a hill: • Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into N (Neutral) to rev-up the engine and regain forward momentum. This will not work. The vehicle can roll backward very quickly and could go out of control. • Never try to turn around if about to stall when going up a hill. If the hill is steep enough to stall the vehicle, it is steep enough to cause it to roll over. If you cannot make it up the hill, back straight down the hill. If, after stalling, you try to back down the hill and decide you just cannot do it, set the parking brake, put your transmission in P (Park), and turn off the engine. Leave the veh[...]
-
Page 349
• Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts? Logs? Boulders? • What is at the bottom of the hill? Is there a hidden creek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks? If you decide you can go down a hill safely, try to keep the vehicle headed straight down. Use a low gear so engine drag can help the brakes so they do not have to do all the work. Descend slowly, keeping the vehicle under control at all times. { CAUTION: Heavy braking when going down a hill can cause your brakes to overheat and fade. This could cause loss of control and a serious accident. Apply the brakes lightly when descending a hill and use a low gear to keep vehicle speed under control. Things not to do when driving d[...]
-
Page 350
Driving Across an Incline An off-road trail will probably go across the incline of a hill. To decide whether to try to drive across the incline, consider the following: { CAUTION: Driving across an incline that is too steep will make your vehicle roll over. You could be seriously injured or killed. If you have any doubt about the steepness of the incline, do not drive across it. Find another route instead. • A hill that can be driven straight up or down might be too steep to drive across. When going straight up or down a hill, the length of the wheel base — the distance from the front wheels to the rear wheels — reduces the likelihood the vehicle will tumble end over end. But when driv[...]
-
Page 351
Stalling on an Incline { CAUTION: Getting out on the downhill (low) side of a vehicle stopped across an incline is dangerous. If the vehicle rolls over, you could be crushed or killed. Always get out on the uphill (high) side of the vehicle and stay well clear of the rollover path. If the vehicle stalls when crossing an incline, be sure you, and any passengers, get out on the uphill side, even if the door there is harder to open. If you get out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to roll over, you will be right in its path. If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the path the vehicle will take if it does roll over. Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow, or Ice When you drive in mud, sno[...]
-
Page 352
Driving in Water { CAUTION: Driving through rushing water can be dangerous. Deep water can sweep your vehicle downstream and you and your passengers could drown. If it is only shallow water, it can still wash away the ground from under your tires, and you could lose traction and roll the vehicle over. Do not drive through rushing water. Heavy rain can mean flash flooding, and flood waters demand extreme caution. Find out how deep the water is before driving through it. Do not try it if it is deep enough to cover the wheel hubs, axles, or exhaust pipe — you probably will not get through. Deep water can damage the axle and other vehicle parts. If the water is not too deep, drive slowly th[...]
-
Page 353
Driving at Night Night driving is more dangerous than day driving because some drivers are likely to be impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue. Night driving tips include: • Drive defensively. • Do not drink and drive. • Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside rearview mirror. • Slow down and keep more space between you and other vehicles because headlamps can only light up so much road ahead. • Watch for animals. • When tired, pull off the road. • Do not wear sunglasses. • Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps. • Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle clean — inside and out. • Keep your eyes moving, espe[...]
-
Page 354
Hydroplaning Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under your vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on the water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road. There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet. Other Rainy Weather Tips Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips include: • Allow extra following distance. • Pass with caution. • Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape. • Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled. • Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires on page 5-[...]
-
Page 355
Hill and Mountain Roads Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving in these conditions include: • Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape. • Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling system, and transmission. • Going down steep or long hills, shift to a lower gear. { CAUTION: If you do not shift down, the brakes could get so hot that they would not work well. You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down to let the engine assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope. { CAUTION: Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or with the ignition off is dangerous. The bra[...]
-
Page 356
Winter Driving Driving on Snow or Ice Drive carefully when there is snow or ice between the tires and the road, creating less traction or grip. Wet ice can occur at about 32°F (0°C) when freezing rain begins to fall, resulting in even less traction. Avoid driving on wet ice or in freezing rain until roads can be treated with salt or sand. Drive with caution, whatever the condition. Accelerate gently so traction is not lost. Accelerating too quickly causes the wheels to spin and makes the surface under the tires slick, so there is even less traction. Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface under the tires even more[...]
-
Page 357
{ CAUTION: Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle. This may cause exhaust gases to get inside. Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause unconsciousness and even death. If the vehicle is stuck in the snow: • Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle, especially any that is blocking the exhaust pipe. • Check again from time to time to be sure snow does not collect there. • Open a window about two inches (5 cm) on the side of the vehicle that is away from the wind to bring in fresh air. • Fully open the air outlets on or under the instrument panel. • Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting that circulates the [...]
-
Page 358
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4-30 . If the vehicle has a traction system, it can often help to free a stuck vehicle. Refer to the vehicle’s traction system in the Index. If stuck too severely for the traction system to free the vehicle, turn the traction system off and use the rocking method. { CAUTION: If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high speed, they can explode, and you or others could be injured. The vehicle can overheat, causing an engine compartment fire or other damage. Spin the wheels as little as possible a[...]
-
Page 359
Recovery Hooks { CAUTION: These hooks, when used, are under a lot of force. Always pull the vehicle straight out. Never pull on the hooks at a sideways angle. The hooks could break off and you or others could be injured from the chain or cable snapping back. Notice: Never use recovery hooks to tow the vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged and it would not be covered by warranty. For vehicles with recovery hooks at the front of the vehicle, you can use them if you are stuck off-road and need to be pulled to some place where you can continue driving. 4-31[...]
-
Page 360
Loading the Vehicle It is very important to know how much weight your vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it was designed to carry, the Tire and Loading Information label and the Certification/Tire label. { CAUTION: Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on the vehicle can break, and it can change the way your vehicle handles. These could cause you to lose control and crash. Also, overloading can sho[...]
-
Page 361
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows the size of the original equipment tires (C) and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). For more information on tires and inflation see Tires on page 5-64 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-73 . There is also important loading information on the vehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axles. See “Certification/Tire Label” later in this section. Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle?[...]
-
Page 362
Item Description Total A Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 1 = 1,000 lbs (453 kg) B Subtract Occupant Weight 150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 = 300 lbs (136 kg) C Available Occupant and Cargo Weight = 700 lbs (317 kg) Item Description Total A Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 2 = 1,000 lbs (453 kg) B Subtract Occupant Weight 150 lbs (68 kg) × 5 = 750 lbs (340 kg) C Available Cargo Weight = 250 lbs (113 kg) Example 1 Example 2 4-34[...]
-
Page 363
Item Description Total A Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 3 = 1,000 lbs (453 kg) B Subtract Occupant Weight 200 lbs (91 kg) × 5 = 1,000 lbs (453 kg) C Available Cargo Weight = 0 lbs (0 kg) Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label for specific information about your vehicle’s capacity weight and seating positions. The combined weight of the driver, passengers, and cargo should never exceed your vehicle’s capacity weight. Certification/Tire Label A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is found on the rear edge of the driver’s door. The label shows the size of your vehicle’s original tires and the inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross weight ca[...]
-
Page 364
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the maximum weights for the front and rear axles, called Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads on your front and rear axles, you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help you with this. Be sure to spread out your load equally on both sides of the centerline. Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the GAWR for either the front or rear axle. The Certification/Tire label also contains important information about your Front Axle Reserve Capacity. See “What is front axle reserve capacity, and how do I calculate it?” under Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment on page 4-38 . { CAUTION:[...]
-
Page 365
{ CAUTION: Things you put inside your vehicle can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or in a crash. • Put things in the cargo area of your vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly. • Never stack heavier things, like suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some of them are above the tops of the seats. • Do not leave an unsecured child restraint in your vehicle. • When you carry something inside the vehicle, secure it whenever you can. • Do not leave a seat folded down unless you need to. There is also important loading information for off-road driving in this manual. See “Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road Driving“ under Of f-Road Driving on page 4-12 . Two-Tiered L[...]
-
Page 366
Add-On Equipment When you carry removable items, you may need to put a limit on how many people you carry inside your vehicle. Be sure to weigh your vehicle before you buy and install the new equipment. Notice : Overloading your vehicle may cause damage. Repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Do not overload your vehicle. Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) of the front or rear axle. * Equipment Maximum Weight Ladder Rack and Cargo 750 lbs (340 kg) Cross Toolbox and Cargo 400 lbs (181 kg) Side Boxes and Cargo 250 lbs per side (113 kg per side) * The combined weight for all rail-mounted equipment should not exceed 1,000 lbs (454 kg). Adding a Snow Plow or Simila[...]
-
Page 367
The plow your vehicle can carry depends on many things, such as: • The options your vehicle came with, and the weight of those options. • The weight and number of passengers you intend to carry. • The weight of items you have added to your vehicle, like a tool box or truck cap. • The total weight of any additional cargo you intend to carry. Say, for example, you have a 700 lb (318 kg) snow plow. The total weight of all occupants and cargo inside the cab should not exceed 300 lb (135 kg). This means that you may only be able to carry one passenger. But, even this may be too much if you have got other equipment already adding to the weight of your vehicle. Here are some guidelines for [...]
-
Page 368
Front axle reserve capacity is the difference between your front Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) and the front axle weight of your vehicle with full fuel and passengers. Basically, it is the amount of weight you can add to your front axle before reaching your front GAWR. The front axle reserve capacity for your vehicle can be found in the lower right corner of the Certification/Tire label, as shown. In order to calculate the amount of weight any front accessory, such as a snow plow, is adding to the front axle, use the following formula: (W x (A + W.B.)) /W.B.= Weight the accessory is adding to the front axle. Where: W = Weight of added accessory A = Distance that the accessory is in front [...]
-
Page 369
For example, adding a 700 lb (318 kg) snow plow actually adds more than 700 lbs (318 kg) to the front axle. Using the formula, if the snow plow is 4 ft (122 cm) in front of the front axle and the wheel base is 10 ft (305 cm), then: W = 700 lb (318 kg) A = 4 ft (122 cm) W.B. = 10 ft (305 cm) (W x (A + W.B.))/W.B. = (700 x (4 + 10))/10 = 980 lbs (445 kg) So, if your truck’s front axle reserve capacity is more than 980 lbs (445 kg), you could add the snow plow without exceeding the front GAWR. You can add heavier equipment on the front of the vehicle if you compensate for it by carrying fewer passengers, less cargo, or by positioning cargo towards the rear. This has the effect of reducing the[...]
-
Page 370
Keep in mind that reserve capacity numbers are intended as a guide when selecting the amount of equipment or cargo your truck can carry. If you are unsure of your vehicle’s front, rear, or total weight, go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer/retailer can also help you with this. The total vehicle reserve capacity for your vehicle can be found in the lower right corner of the Certification/Tire label as shown previously. See your dealer/retailer for additional advice and information about using a snow plow on your vehicle. Also, see Loading the Vehicle on page 4-32 . Emergency Roof Lamp Provisions Vehicles with the RPO VYU snow plow prep package also have an emergency ro[...]
-
Page 371
Refer to the Truck-Camper Loading Information label in the glove box for dimensions A and B as shown in the following illustration. Use the rear edge of the load floor for measurement purposes. The recommended location for the cargo center of gravity is at point C for the CWR. It is the point where the mass of a body is concentrated and, if suspended at that point, would balance the front and rear. Here is an example of proper truck and camper match: A. Camper Center of Gravity B. Recommended Center of Gravity Location Zone When the truck is used to carry a slide-in camper, the total cargo load of the truck consists of the manufacturer’s camper weight figure, the weight of installed addi[...]
-
Page 372
You must weigh any accessories or other equipment that you add to your vehicle. Then, subtract this extra weight from the CWR. This extra weight may shorten the center of gravity zone of your vehicle. Your dealer can help you with this. If your slide-in camper and its load weighs less than the CWR, the center of gravity zone for your vehicle may be larger. Your dealer can help you make a good vehicle-camper match and help you determine the CWR. After you have loaded your vehicle and camper, drive to a weigh station and weigh the front and rear wheels separately. This will tell you the loads on the axles. The loads on the front and rear axles should not be more than either of the Gross Axle W[...]
-
Page 373
Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab We are aware that some vehicle owners might consider having the pickup box removed and a commercial or recreational body installed. Owners should be aware that, as manufactured, there are differences between a chassis cab and a pickup with the box removed which could affect vehicle safety. The components necessary to adapt a pickup to permit its safe use with a specialized body should be installed by the body builder. Towing Towing Your Vehicle To avoid damage, the disabled vehicle should be towed with all four wheels off the ground. Consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing service if the disabled vehicle must be towed. See Roadside Assistance Pr[...]
-
Page 374
Dinghy Towing Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles Notice: If the vehicle is towed with all four wheels on the ground, the drivetrain components could be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not tow the vehicle with all four wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towed with all four wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drive transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication while being towed. Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles Use the following procedure to dinghy tow a four-wheel-drive vehicle: 1. Position the vehicle being towed behind the tow vehicle and shift the transmission to P (Park). 2. Turn the engine off and firmly set the parking brake. 3. Se[...]
-
Page 375
{ CAUTION: Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’s transfer case into N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in P (Park). The driver or others could be injured. Make sure the parking brake is firmly set before the transfer case is shifted to N (Neutral). 4. Shift the transfer case to N (Neutral). See “Shifting into Neutral” under Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-36 for the proper procedure to select the Neutral position for the vehicle. 5. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle being towed is firmly attached to the towing vehicle. 6. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF and remove the key — the steering wheel will still turn. After towing, see “Shifting [...]
-
Page 376
To dolly tow a two-wheel-drive vehicle, the vehicle must be towed with the rear wheels on the dolly. See “Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off the Ground)” later in this section for more information. Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles Use the following procedure to dolly tow a four-wheel-drive vehicle from the front: 1. Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the dolly manufacturer’s instructions. 2. Drive the front wheels onto the dolly. 3. Shift the transmission to P (Park). 4. Firmly set the parking brake. { CAUTION: Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’s transfer case into N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in P (Park). The driver or others could be injured[...]
-
Page 377
Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Of f the Ground) Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles Use the following procedure to dolly tow a two-wheel-drive vehicle from the rear: 1. Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the dolly manufacturer’s instructions. 2. Drive the rear wheels onto the dolly. 3. Firmly set the parking brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-50 . 4. Put the transmission in P (Park). 5. Secure the vehicle to the dolly following the manufacturer’s instructions. 6. Use an adequate clamping device designed for towing to ensure that the front wheels are locked into the straight position. 7. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles Use the following procedure to dolly tow a four-whe[...]
-
Page 378
6. Use an adequate clamping device designed for towing to ensure that the front wheels are locked into the straight position. { CAUTION: Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’s transfer case into N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in P (Park). The driver or others could be injured. Make sure the parking brake is firmly set before the transfer case is shifted to N (Neutral). 7. Shift the transfer case to N (Neutral). See “Shifting into Neutral” under Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-36 for the proper procedure to select the neutral position for the vehicle. 8. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. After towing, see “Shifting Out of Neutral” under Four-Wheel Driv[...]
-
Page 379
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage the vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty. To pull a trailer correctly, follow the advice in this section and see your dealer/retailer for important information about towing a trailer with the vehicle. To identify the trailering capacity of the vehicle, read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that appears later in this section. Trailering is different than just driving the vehicle by itself. Trailering means changes in handling, acceleration, braking, durability and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to be used properly. The following information has many [...]
-
Page 380
Weight of the Trailer How heavy can a trailer safely be? It depends on how the rig is used. For example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how much the vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important. It can depend on any special equipment on the vehicle, and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle can carry. See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later in this section for more information. Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight. Use the fol[...]
-
Page 381
Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR (a) 1500 Series 2WD Extended Cab Standard Box (b) 4.3L V6 (c) 3.23 4,400 lbs (1 996 kg) 9,500 lbs (4 309 kg) 4.3L V6 (c) 3.73 4,900 lbs (2 223 kg) 10,000 lbs (4 536 kg) 4.8L V8 (c) 3.23 4,700 lbs (2 132 kg) 10,000 lbs (4 536 kg) 4.8L V8 3.73 6,700 lbs (3 039 kg) 12,000 lbs (5 443 kg) 5.3L V8 4 Speed Automatic 3.42 6,700 lbs (3 039 kg) 12,000 lbs (5 443 kg) 5.3L V8 4 Speed Automatic 3.73 7,700 lbs (3 493 kg) 13,000 lbs (5 897 kg) 5.3L V8 6 Speed Automatic 3.42 6,200 lbs (2 812 kg) 11,500 lbs (5 216 kg) 5.3L V8 6 Speed Automatic, K5L HD Cooling Pkg — Fifth-Wheel Trailer 3.42 9,100 lbs (4 128 kg) 15,000 lbs (6 804 kg) 5.3L V8 6 Speed Automatic, K[...]
-
Page 382
Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR (a) 1500 Series 2WD Extended Cab Short Box (c) 4.3L V6 3.23 4,400 lbs (1 996 kg) 9,500 lbs (4 309 kg) 4.3L V6 3.73 4,900 lbs (2 223 kg) 10,000 lbs (4 536 kg) 4.8L V8 3.42 5,800 lbs (2 631 kg) 12,000 lbs (5 443 kg) 4.8L V8 3.73 6,800 lbs (3 084 kg) 12,000 lbs (5 443 kg) 5.3L V8 3.42 6,800 lbs (3 084 kg) 12,000 lbs (5 443 kg) 5.3L V8 3.73 7,800 lbs (3 538 kg) 13,000 lbs (5 897 kg) 6.0L V8 3.42 6,700 lbs (3 039 kg) 12,000 lbs (5 443 kg) 6.0L V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg 3.42 9,700 lbs (4 400 kg) 15,000 lbs (6 804 kg) 1500 Series 2WD Crew Cab Short Box (c) 4.8L V8 3.23 4,700 lbs (2 132 kg) 10,000 lbs (4 536 kg) 4.8L V8 3.73 6,700 lbs (3 039 kg) 12,000 lbs [...]
-
Page 383
Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR (a) 4.8L V8 (c) 3.23 5,100 lbs (2 313 kg) 10,000 lbs (4 536 kg) 4.8L V8 3.73 7,100 lbs (3 221 kg) 12,000 lbs (5 443 kg) 5.3L V8 4 Speed Automatic 3.42 7,000 lbs (3 175 kg) 12,000 lbs (5 443 kg) 5.3L V8 4 Speed Automatic 3.73 8,000 lbs (3 629 kg) 13,000 lbs (5 897 kg) 5.3L V8 6 Speed Automatic 3.42 6,500 lbs (2 948 kg) 11,500 lbs (5 216 kg) 5.3L V8 6 Speed Automatic, K5L HD Cooling Pkg — Fifth-Wheel Trailer 3.42 8,700 lbs (3 946 kg) 15,000 lbs (6 804 kg) 5.3L V8 6 Speed Automatic, K5L HD Cooling Pkg — Conventional Trailer 3.42 10,000 lbs (4 536 kg) 15,000 lbs (6 804 kg) 1500 Series 2WD Extended Cab Long Box (b) 5.3L V8 4 Speed Automatic — F[...]
-
Page 384
Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR (a) 1500 Series 4WD Regular Cab Standard Box (b) 4.3L V6 (c) 3.73 5,100 lbs (2 313 kg) 10,000 lbs (4 536 kg) 4.8L V8 (c) 3.42 6,000 lbs (2 722 kg) 11,000 lbs (4 990 kg) 5.3L V8 3.42 6,400 lbs (2 903 kg) 11,500 lbs (5 216 kg) 5.3L V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg — Fifth-Wheel Trailer 3.42 8,100 lbs (3 674 kg) 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg) 5.3L V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg — Conventional Trailer 3.42 8,900 lbs (4 037 kg) 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg) 5.3L V8 3.73 7,900 lbs (3 583 kg) 13,000 lbs (5 897 kg) 5.3L V8 — Fifth-Wheel Trailer 4.10 8,300 lbs (3 765 kg) 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg) 5.3L V8 — Conventional Trailer 4.10 8,900 lbs (4 037 kg) 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg) 1500 Series [...]
-
Page 385
Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR (a) 6.0L V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg — Fifth-Wheel Trailer 3.42 8,400 lbs (3 810 kg) 15,000 lbs (6 804 kg) 6.0L V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg — Conventional Trailer 3.42 9,400 lbs (4 264 kg) 15,000 lbs (6 804 kg) 6.0L V8 NHT Max Trailering Pkg — Fifth-Wheel Trailer 3.73 9,700 lbs (4 400 kg) 16,000 lbs (7 257 kg) 6.0L V8 NHT Max Trailering Pkg — Conventional Trailer 3.73 10,400 lbs (4 717 kg) 16,000 lbs (7 257 kg) 1500 Series 4WD Extended Cab Short Box (c) 4.8L V8 3.42 5,500 lbs (2 495 kg) 11,000 lbs (4 990 kg) 4.8L V8 4.10 8,500 lbs (3 856 kg) 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg) 5.3L V8 3.73 7,500 lbs (3 402 kg) 13,000 lbs (5 897 kg) 5.3L V8 4.10 8,500 lbs (3 856 k[...]
-
Page 386
Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR (a) 6.0L V8 NHT Max Trailering Pkg — Fifth-Wheel Trailer 3.73 9,900 lbs (4 491 kg) 16,000 lbs (7 257 kg) 6.0L, 6.2L V8 NHT Max Trailering Pkg — Conventional Trailer 3.73 10,400 lbs (4 717 kg) 16,000 lbs (7 257 kg) 1500 Series 4WD Regular Cab Long Box (b) 4.3L V6 (c) 3.73 4,900 lbs (2 223 kg) 10,000 lbs (4 536 kg) 4.8L V8 (c) 3.42 5,800 lbs (2 631 kg) 11,000 lbs (4 990 kg) 5.3L V8 3.42 6,300 lbs (2 858 kg) 11,500 lbs (5 216 kg) 5.3L V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg — Fifth-Wheel Trailer 3.42 9,500 lbs (4 309 kg) 15,000 lbs (6 804 kg) 5.3L V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg — Conventional Trailer 3.42 9,800 lbs (4 445 kg) 15,000 lbs (6 804 kg) 5.3L V8 — Fifth-W[...]
-
Page 387
Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR (a) 5.3L LMG V8 3.73 7,600 lbs (3 447 kg) 13,000 lbs (5 897 kg) 5.3L LY5 V8 3.73 7,300 lbs (3 311 kg) 13,000 lbs (5 897 kg) 2500 Series 2WD Extended Cab Standard Box HD (d) 6.0L V8 3.73 4.10 10,200 lbs (4 627 kg) 12,700 lbs (5 761 kg) 16,000 lbs (7 257 kg) 18,500 lbs (8 391 kg) 2500 Series 2WD Crew Cab Standard Box HD (d) 6.0L V8 3.73 4.10 10,000 lbs (4 536 kg) 12,500 lbs (5 670 kg) 16,000 lbs (7 257 kg) 18,500 lbs (8 391 kg) 2500 Series 2WD Regular Cab Long Box HD (d) 6.0L V8 3.73 4.10 10,500 lbs (4 763 kg) 13,000 lbs (5 897 kg) 16,000 lbs (7 257 kg) 18,500 lbs (8 391 kg) 2500 Series 2WD Extended Cab Long Box HD (d) 6.0L V8 3.73 4.10 10,000 lbs[...]
-
Page 388
Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR (a) 2500 Series 4WD Regular Cab Long Box HD (d) 6.0L V8 3.73 4.10 10,200 lbs (4 627 kg) 12,700 lbs (5 761 kg) 16,000 lbs (7 257 kg) 18,500 lbs (8 391 kg) 2500 Series 4WD Extended Cab Long Box HD (d) 6.0L V8 3.73 4.10 9,800 lbs (4 445 kg) 12,300 lbs (5 579 kg) 16,000 lbs (7 257 kg) 18,500 lbs (8 391 kg) 2500 Series 4WD Crew Cab Long Box HD (d) 6.0L V8 3.73 4.10 9,600 lbs (4 355 kg) 12,100 lbs (5 489 kg) 16,000 lbs (7 257 kg) 18,500 lbs (8 391 kg) 3500 Series 2WD Extended Cab (e) 6.0L V8 (Single Rear Wheels) 3.73 4.10 9,900 lbs (4 491 kg) 12,400 lbs (5 625 kg) 16,000 lbs (7 257 kg) 18,500 lbs (8 391 kg) 6.0L V8 (Dual Rear Wheels) 3.73 4.10 9,500 l[...]
-
Page 389
Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR (a) 3500 Series 4WD Extended Cab (e) 6.0L V8 (Single Rear Wheels) 3.73 4.10 9,600 lbs (4 355 kg) 12,100 lbs (5 489 kg) 16,000 lbs (7 257 kg) 18,500 lbs (8 391 kg) 6.0L V8 (Dual Rear Wheels) 3.73 4.10 9,200 lbs (4 173 kg) 11,700 lbs (5 307 kg) 16,000 lbs (7 257 kg) 18,500 lbs (8 391 kg) 3500 Series 4WD Crew Cab (e) 6.0L V8 (Single Rear Wheels) 3.73 4.10 9,400 lbs (4 264 kg) 11,900 lbs (5 398 kg) 16,000 lbs (7 257 kg) 18,500 lbs (8 391 kg) 6.0L V8 (Dual Rear Wheels) 3.73 4.10 9,100 lbs (4 128 kg) 11,600 lbs (5 262 kg) 16,000 lbs (7 257 kg) 18,500 lbs (8 391 kg) (a) The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the com[...]
-
Page 390
Weight of the Trailer Tongue The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the total gross weight of the vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo carried in it, and the people who will be riding in the vehicle. If there are a lot of options, equipment, passengers or cargo in the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue weight the vehicle can carry, which will also reduce the trailer weight the vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer, the tongue load must be added to the GVW because the vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See for more information about the vehicle’s maximum load capacity. The trailer t[...]
-
Page 391
Consider the following example: A vehicle model base weight is 5,500 lbs (2 495 kg); 2,800 lbs (1 270 kg) at the front axle and 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg) at the rear axle. It has a GVWR of 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg), a RGAWR of 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) and a GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating) of 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg). The trailer rating should be: Expect tongue weight to be at least 10 percent of trailer weight (850 lbs (386 kg)) and because the weight is applied well behind the rear axle, the effect on the rear axle is greater than just the weight itself, as much as 1.5 times as much. The weight at the rear axle could be 850 lbs (386 kg) X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs (578 kg). Since the rear axle already weighs 2[...]
-
Page 392
Since tongue weight is usually at least 10 percent of total loaded trailer weight, expect that the largest trailer the vehicle can properly handle is 6,000 lbs (2 721 kg). It is important that the vehicle does not exceed any of its ratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR, Maximum Trailer Rating or Tongue Weight. The only way to be sure it is not exceeding any of these ratings is to weigh the vehicle and trailer. Total Weight on the Vehicle’s Tires Be sure the vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit for cold tires. These numbers can be found on the Certification label at the rear edge of the drivers door or see Loading the Vehicle on page 4-32 for more information. Make sure not to go ove[...]
-
Page 393
If a step-bumper hitch will be used, the bumper could be damaged in sharp turns. Make sure there is ample room when turning to avoid contact between the trailer and the bumper. If the loaded trailer being pulled will weigh more than 5,000 lbs (2 270 kg), be sure to use a properly mounted weight-distributing hitch and sway control of the proper size. This equipment is very important for proper vehicle loading and good handling when driving. Always use a sway control if the trailer will weigh more than these limits. Ask a hitch dealer about sway controls. Fifth Wheel and Gooseneck Trailering Fifth wheel and gooseneck trailers can be used with many pickup models. These trailers place a larger p[...]
-
Page 394
Safety Chains Always attach chains between the vehicle and the trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting the road if it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. If the trailer being towed weighs up to 5,000 lbs (2 271 kg) with a factory-installed step bumper, safety chains may be attached to the attaching points on the bumper. If the trailer being towed weighs up to the vehicle’s trailer rating limit, safety chains may be attached to the attaching point on the hitch platform. Always leave just enough slack so the rig can turn.[...]
-
Page 395
Tow/Haul is designed to be most effective when the vehicle and trailer combined weight is at least 75 percent of the vehicle’s Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR). See “Weight of the Trailer” later in the section. Tow/Haul is most useful under the following driving conditions: • When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load through rolling terrain. • When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load in stop and go traff ic. • When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load in busy parking lots where improved low speed control of the vehicle is desired. Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haul when lightly loaded or with no trailer at all will not cause damage. However,[...]
-
Page 396
Integrated Trailer Brake Control System The vehicle may have an Integrated Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system for electric trailer brakes. This symbol is located on the Trailer Brake Control Panel on vehicles with an Integrated Trailer Brake Control System. The power output to the trailer brakes is based on the amount of brake pressure being applied by the vehicle’s brake system. This available power output to the trailer brakes can be adjusted to a wide range of trailering situations. The ITBC system is integrated with the vehicle’s brake, anti-lock brake and StabiliTrak (if equipped) systems. In trailering conditions that cause the vehicle’s anti-lock brake or StabiliTrak systems to[...]
-
Page 397
CAUTION: (Continued) with surge, air or electric-over-hydraulic trailer brake systems. To determine the type of brakes on the trailer and the availability of controllers, check with your trailer manufacturer or dealer/retailer. When trailering, make sure of the following: • The ITBC system is used only with trailers that are equipped with electric brakes. • All applicable local and federal laws and regulations are followed. • All electrical and mechanical connections to the trailer are made correctly. • The trailer’s brakes are in proper working condition. • The trailer and vehicle are properly loaded for the towing condition. The ITBC system is a factory installed item. Out-of-f[...]
-
Page 398
Trailer Brake DIC Display Page The ITBC system displays messages into the vehicle’s Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-66 for more information. The display page indicates Trailer Gain setting, power output to the electric trailer brakes, trailer connection and system operational status. A. Trailer Gain Setting B. Power Output to Trailer Brakes C. No trailer with electric brakes connected or fault present The Trailer Brake Display Page can be displayed by performing any of the following actions: • Scrolling through the DIC menu pages using the odometer trip stem or the DIC Vehicle Information button (if equipped). • Pressing a Trailer Gain button ?[...]
-
Page 399
hold a gain button to cause the Trailer Gain to continuously adjust. To turn the output to the trailer off, adjust the Trailer Gain setting to 0.0 (zero). 0.0 (zero) gain is the factory default setting. To properly adjust trailer gain, see the Trailer Gain Adjustment Procedure later in this section. TRAILER OUTPUT – This is displayed any time a trailer with electric brakes is connected. Output to the electric brakes is based on the amount of vehicle braking present and relative to the Trailer Gain setting. Output is displayed from 0 to 10 bars for each gain setting. The Trailer Output will indicate “ ------ “o nt h e Trailer Brake Display Page whenever the following occur: • No trail[...]
-
Page 400
A trailer that is under-gained may result in not enough trailer braking. Both of these conditions may result in poorer stopping and stability of the vehicle and trailer. Use the following procedure to correctly adjust Trailer Gain for each towing condition: 1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in proper working condition. 2. Connect a properly loaded trailer to the vehicle and make all necessary mechanical and electrical connections. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-32 for more information. 3. After the electrical connection is made to a trailer equipped with electric brakes: • A TRAILER CONNECTED message will be briefly displayed on the DIC display. • The Trailer Brake Display Page wil[...]
-
Page 401
Other ITBC Related DIC Messages In addition to displaying TRAILER GAIN and TRAILER OUTPUT through the DIC, trailer connection and ITBC system status is displayed in the DIC. TRAILER CONNECTED – This message will be briefly displayed when a trailer with electric brakes is first connected to the vehicle. This message will automatically turn off in about ten seconds. The driver can also acknowledge this message before it automatically turns off. CHECK TRAILER WIRING – This message will be displayed if: 1. The ITBC system first determines connection to a trailer with electric brakes and then the trailer harness becomes disconnected from the vehicle. If the disconnect occurs while the vehi[...]
-
Page 402
SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEM – This message will be displayed when there is a problem with the ITBC system. If this message persists over multiple ignition cycles there is a problem with the ITBC system. Take the vehicle to an authorized GM dealer to have the ITBC system diagnosed and repaired. If either the CHECK TRAILER WIRING or SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEM message is displayed while driving the vehicle, power is no longer available to the trailer brakes. When traff ic conditions allow, carefully pull the vehicle over to the side of the road and turn the ignition off. Check the wiring connection to the trailer and turn the ignition back on. If either of these messages continues, either [...]
-
Page 403
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience. Get to know the rig before setting out for the open road. Get acquainted with the feel of handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now longer and not as responsive as the vehicle is by itself. Before starting, check all trailer hitch parts and attachments, safety chains, electrical connectors, lamps, tires and mirror adjustments. If the trailer has electric brakes, start the vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working. This checks the electrical connection at the same time. During the trip,[...]
-
Page 404
Making Turns Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering could cause the trailer to come in contact with the vehicle. The vehicle could be damaged. Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering. When turning with a trailer, make wider turns than normal. Do this so the trailer will not strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance. Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer The arrows on the instrument panel flash whenever signaling a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps also flash, telling other drivers the vehicle is turning, changing lanes or stopping. When towing a trailer, the arrows on the [...]
-
Page 405
Parking on Hills { CAUTION: Parking the vehicle on a hill with the trailer attached can be dangerous. If something goes wrong, the rig could start to move. People can be injured, and both the vehicle and the trailer can be damaged. When possible, always park the rig on a flat surface. If parking the rig on a hill: 1. Press the brake pedal, but do not shift into P (Park) yet. Turn the wheels into the curb if facing downhill or into traff ic if facing uphill. 2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels. 3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load. 4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then apply the parking brake and shift into P (Park). [...]
-
Page 406
Leaving After Parking on a Hill 1. Apply and hold the brake pedal while you: • Start the engine • Shift into a gear • Release the parking brake 2. Let up on the brake pedal. 3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks. 4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks. Maintenance When Trailer Towing The vehicle needs service more often when pulling a trailer. See this manual’s Maintenance Schedule or Index for more information. Things that are especially important in trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid, engine oil, axle lubricant, belts, cooling system and brake system. It is a good idea to inspect these before and during the trip. Check periodically[...]
-
Page 407
Heavy-DutyTrailer Wiring Harness Package For vehicles equipped with heavy duty trailering, the harness is connected to a bracket on the hitch platform. The seven-wire harness contains the following trailer circuits: • Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal • Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal • Brown: Taillamps • White: Ground • Light Green: Back-up Lamps • Red: Battery Feed* • Dark Blue: Trailer Brake* *The fuses for these two circuits are installed in the underhood electrical center, but the wires are not connected. They should be connected by your dealer/retailer or a qualified service center. The fuse and wire for the ITBC is factory installed and connected if the vehicle is equipp[...]
-
Page 408
Camper/Fifth-Wheel Trailer Wiring Package The seven-wire camper harness is located under the front edge of the pickup box on the drivers side of the vehicle, attached to the frame bracket. A connector must be added to the wiring harness which connects to the camper. The harness contains the following camper/trailer circuits: • Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal • Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal • Brown: Taillamps • White: Ground • Light Green: Back-up Lamps • Red: Battery Feed • Dark Blue: Trailer Brake If the vehicle is equipped with the “Heavy-Duty Trailering” option, please refer to “Heavy-Duty Trailer Wiring Package” earlier in this section. When the camper-wiring har[...]
-
Page 409
Electric Brake Control Wiring Provisions These wiring provisions are included with the vehicle as part of the trailer wiring package. These provisions are for an electric brake controller. The instrument panel contains blunt cut wires behind the steering column for the trailer brake controller. The harness contains the following wires: • Dark Blue: Brake Signal to Trailer Connector • Red/Black: Battery • Light Blue/White: Brake Switch • White: Ground It should be installed by your dealer/retailer or a qualified service center. If the vehicle is equipped with an ITBC, the blunt cuts exist, but are not connected further in the harness. If an aftermarket trailer brake controller is ins[...]
-
Page 410
✍ NOTES 4-82[...]
-
Page 411
Service ........................................................... .5-4 Accessories and Modifications ......................... .5-4 California Proposition 65 Warning .................... .5-5 California Perchlorate Materials Requirements .... .5-5 Doing Your Own Service Work ........................ .5-5 Adding Equipment to the Outside of the Vehicle ..................................................... .5-6 Fuel ............................................................... .5-6 Gasoline Octane ........................................... .5-6 Gasoline Specifications ................................... .5-7 California Fuel .............................................. .5-7 Additives ..[...]
-
Page 412
Bulb Replacement ......................................... .5-58 Halogen Bulbs ............................................. .5-58 Headlamps ................................................. .5-58 Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) and Cargo Lamp ............................................ .5-59 Pickup Box Identification and Fender Marker L a m p s .................................................... .5-60 Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps ........................................ .5-61 License Plate Lamp ..................................... .5-63 Replacement Bulbs ...................................... .5-63 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ............. .5-64 Tires [...]
-
Page 413
Tires ........................................................ .5-119 Sheet Metal Damage .................................. .5-119 Finish Damage .......................................... .5-120 Underbody Maintenance .............................. .5-120 Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. .5-120 Vehicle Identification .................................... .5-121 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............... .5-121 Service Parts Identification Label .................. .5-121 Electrical System ......................................... .5-121 Add-On Electrical Equipment ........................ .5-121 Windshield Wiper Fuses .............................. .5-122 Power[...]
-
Page 414
Service For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer. You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and supported service people. Genuine GM parts have one of these marks: Accessories and Modifications When non-dealer/non-retailer accessories are added to the vehicle, they can affect vehicle performance and safety, including such things as airbags, braking, stability, ride and handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems like antilock brakes, traction control, and stability control. Some of these accessories could even cause malfunction or damage not covered by the vehicle warranty. Damage to vehicle components resulting from the installation o[...]
-
Page 415
California Proposition 65 Warning Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems (including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and some component wear by-products contain and/or emit these chemicals. California Perchlorate Materials Requirements Certain types of automotive applications, such as airbag initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium batteries contained in remote keyless transmitters, may contain perchlorate materials. Special handling may be necessary. For additional information, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/[...]
-
Page 416
This vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to do your own service work, see Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-90 . Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work performed. See Maintenance Record on page 6-19 . Adding Equipment to the Outside of the Vehicle Things added to the outside of the vehicle can affect the airflow around it. This can cause wind noise and can affect fuel economy and windshield washer performance. Check with your dealer/retailer before adding equipment to the outside of the vehicle. Fuel For diesel engine vehicles, see “Diesel Fuel Requirements and Fuel System” in the DURAMAX ® Diesel manual. F[...]
-
Page 417
notice a slight audible knocking noise, commonly referred to as spark knock. If the octane is less than 87, you might notice a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible. Otherwise, you could damage the engine. If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking, the engine needs service. Gasoline Specifications At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specification D 4814 in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511 in Canada. Some gasolines contain an octane-enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend against the use of gasolines containi[...]
-
Page 418
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available in your area. We recommend that you use these gasolines, if they comply with the specifications described earlier. However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containing more than 10% ethanol must not be used in vehicles that were not designed for those fuels. Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber parts. That damage would not be covered under the vehicle warranty. Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low emissions can contain an o[...]
-
Page 419
At a minimum, E85 should meet ASTM Specification D 5798. By definition, this means that fuel labeled E85 will have an ethanol content between 70% and 85%. Filling the fuel tank with fuel mixtures that do not meet ASTM specifications can affect driveability and could cause the malfunction indicator lamp to come on. To ensure quick starts in the wintertime, the E85 fuel must be formulated properly for your climate according to ASTM specification D 5798. If you have trouble starting on E85, it could be because the E85 fuel is not properly formulated for your climate. If this happens, switching to gasoline or adding gasoline to the fuel tank can improve starting. For good starting and heater[...]
-
Page 420
Filling the Tank If the vehicle has the DURAMAX Diesel engine, see the DURAMAX Diesel manual for more information. { CAUTION: Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you and others, read and follow all the instructions on the pump island. Turn off the engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling the vehicle. Do not use cellular phones. Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when refueling the vehicle. This is against the law in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle while pumping fuel. Keep children away from the fuel pump; never let children pum[...]
-
Page 421
{ CAUTION: Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly. If you spill fuel and then something ignites it, you could be badly burned. This spray can happen if the tank is nearly full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way. If the vehicle is a dual fuel tank chassis cab model, and it runs out of fuel, refuel the front fuel tank first to ensure a quick restart. Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Washing Your Vehicl[...]
-
Page 422
Filling a Portable Fuel Container { CAUTION: Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in the vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite the fuel vapor. You can be badly burned and the vehicle damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others: • Dispense fuel only into approved containers. • Do not fill a container while it is inside a vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or on any surface other than the ground. • Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside of the fill opening before operating the nozzle. Contact should be maintained until the filling is complete. • Do not smoke while pumping fuel. • Do not use a cellul[...]
-
Page 423
Hood Release To open the hood: 1. Pull the handle with this symbol on it. It is located inside the vehicle to the left of the brake pedal. 2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and locate the secondary hood release. This is located under the hood, near the center of the grille. 3. Push the secondary hood release to the right. 4. Lift the hood. Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are on properly. Then bring the hood from full open to within 6 inches (152 mm) from the closed position, pause, then push the front center of the hood with a swift, firm motion to fully close the hood. 5-13[...]
-
Page 424
Engine Compartment Overview If the vehicle has the DURAMAX ® Diesel engine, see the DURAMAX ® Diesel manual for more information. When you open the hood on the 5.3L engine (4.3L, 4.8L, 6.0L and 6.2L similar), this is what you will see: 5-14[...]
-
Page 425
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-19 . B. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. See Cooling System on page 5-28 . C. Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on page 5-44 . D. Battery on page 5-43 . E. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil” under Engine Oil on page 5-15 . F. Automatic Transmission Dipstick. See “Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic Transmission Fluid (4-Speed Transmission) on page 5-21 or Automatic Transmission Fluid (6-Speed Transmission) on page 5-24 . G. Remote Negative ( − ) Terminal (Out of View). See Jump Starting on page 5-44 . H. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See “Checking Engine Oil” under Engine Oil on page 5-15 . I. Engine Co[...]
-
Page 426
When to Add Engine Oil If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip of the dipstick, add at least one quart/liter of the recommended oil. This section explains what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities and Specifications on page 5-129 . Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating range, the engine could be damaged. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14 for the location of the engine oil fill cap. Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way back in when through. 5-16[...]
-
Page 427
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use Look for three things: • GM6094M Use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M. • SAE 5W-30 SAE 5W-30 is best for the vehicle. These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50. • American Petroleum Institute (API) starburst symbol Oils meeting these requirements should have the starburst symbol on the container. This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failure to use[...]
-
Page 428
Engine Oil Additives / Engine Oil Flushes Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard GM6094M are all that is needed for good performance and engine protection. Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty. Engine Oil Life System When to Change Engine Oil This vehicle has a computer system that indicates when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at which an oil change is indicated can vary considerably. For the oil life system to work properly, the [...]
-
Page 429
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Whenever the oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs where the oil is changed prior to a CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message coming on, reset the system. Always reset the engine oil life to 100% after every oil change. It will not reset itself. To reset the Engine Oil Life System: 1. Display the OIL LIFE REMAINING on the DIC. If the vehicle does not have DIC buttons, the vehicle must be in P (Park) to access this display. See DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-53 o[...]
-
Page 430
When to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each 50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled Maintenance (Gasoline Engine) on page 6-4 for more information. If driving on dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter at each engine oil change. How to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the engine air cleaner/filter from the vehicle by following Steps 1 through 7. When the engine air cleaner/filter is removed, lightly shake it to release loose dust and dirt. If the engine air cleaner/filter remains caked with dirt, a new filter is r[...]
-
Page 431
3. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter from the housing. Care should be taken to dislodge as little dirt as possible. 4. Clean the engine air cleaner/filter sealing surfaces and the housing. 5. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter. 6. Reinstall the cover and tighten the screws. { CAUTION: Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop flames if the engine backfires. If it is not there and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be careful working on the engine with the air cleaner/filter off. Automatic Transmission Fluid (4-Speed Transmis[...]
-
Page 432
How to Check Automatic Transmission Fluid Because this operation can be a little diff icult, you may choose to have this done at the dealer/retailer service department. If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions here or you could get a false reading on the dipstick. Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage your transmission. Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Too little fluid could cause the transmission to overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check your transmission fluid. Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transmission fluid level if you have [...]
-
Page 433
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps: 1. Locate the transmission dipstick handle with this graphic which is located at the rear of the engine compartment, on the passenger side of the vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14 for more information on location. 2. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel. 3. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and then pull it back out again. 4. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower level. The fluid level must be in the COLD area, below the cross-hatched area, for a cold check or in the HOT or cross-hatched area for a hot check. Be sure to keep the[...]
-
Page 434
How to Add Automatic Transmission Fluid Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of transmission fluid to use. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-15 . Using a funnel, add fluid down the transmission dipstick tube only after checking the transmission fluid while it is hot. A cold check is used only as a reference. If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper fluid to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot check. It does not take much fluid, generally less than one pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill. Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission fluid may damage the vehicle, and the damages may not be covered by the vehicle’s warranty. [...]
-
Page 435
How to Check Automatic Transmission Fluid Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage your transmission. Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Too little fluid could cause the transmission to overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check your transmission fluid. Before checking the fluid level, prepare the vehicle as follows: 1. Start the engine and park the vehicle on a level surface. Keep the engine running. 2. Apply the parking brake and place the shift lever in P (Park). 3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift lever through each gear range, pausing for about three s[...]
-
Page 436
Cold Check Procedure Use this procedure only as a reference to determine if the transmission has enough fluid to be operated safely until a hot check procedure can be made. The hot check procedure is the most accurate method to check the fluid level. Perform the hot check procedure at the first opportunity. Use this cold check procedure to check fluid level when the transmission temperature is between 80°F and 90°F (27°C and 32°C). 1. Locate the transmission dipstick at the rear of the engine compartment, on the passenger side of the vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14 for more information. 2. Flip the handle up, and then pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a cle[...]
-
Page 437
Hot Check Procedure Use this procedure to check the transmission fluid level when the transmission fluid temperature is between 160°F and 200°F (71°C and 93°C). The hot check is the most accurate method to check the fluid level. The hot check should be performed at the first opportunity in order to verify the cold check. The fluid level rises as fluid temperature increases, so it is important to ensure the transmission temperature is within range. 1. Locate the transmission dipstick at the rear of the engine compartment, on the passenger side of the vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14 for more information. 2. Flip the handle up, and then pull out the dipstick and [...]
-
Page 438
Consistency of Readings Always check the fluid level at least twice using the procedure described previously. Consistency (repeatable readings) is important to maintaining proper fluid level. If readings are still inconsistent, contact your dealer/retailer. Cooling System If your vehicle has the DURAMAX ® Diesel engine, see the DURAMAX ® Diesel manual for more information. The Cooling System allows the engine to maintain the correct working temperature. A. Coolant Surge Tank B. Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap C. Engine Cooling Fan 5.3L Engine (4.3L, 4.8L, 6.0L and 6.2L Similar) 5-28[...]
-
Page 439
{ CAUTION: An electric engine cooling fan can start even when the engine is not running. To avoid injury, always keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any engine cooling fan. { CAUTION: Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If you do, you can be burned. Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could cause an engine fire, and you could be burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle. Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL ® can cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could require changing sooner, at 50 000 km (30,000[...]
-
Page 440
What to Use { CAUTION: Adding only plain water to the cooling system can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant mixture will. The vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture, the engine could get too hot but you would not get the overheat warning. The engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL ® coolant. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL ® coolant. If using this mixture, nothing else needs to be added. This mixture: • Gives freezing protection down to − 34°F [...]
-
Page 441
Checking Coolant The coolant surge tank is located in the engine compartment on the passenger side of the vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14 for more information on location. The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking the coolant level. Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant surge tank. If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down. If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at or above the FULL COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL ® coolant at the coolant surge tank, but be sure the cooling system is cool before this is done. The coolant level should be at[...]
-
Page 442
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Surge Tank for Gasoline Engines If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see “Cooling System” in the DURAMAX ® Diesel Supplement for the proper coolant fill procedure. { CAUTION: You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine. Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could cause the engine to overheat and be severely damaged. { CAUTION: An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can start up even when the engine is not running and can cause injury. Keep hands, clothin[...]
-
Page 443
{ CAUTION: Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system can blow out and burn you badly. They are under pressure, and if you turn the coolant surge tank pressure cap — even a little — they can come out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the cooling system, including the coolant surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and coolant surge tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap. If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant as follows: 1. Remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap when the cooling system, including the coolant surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly [...]
-
Page 444
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture to the FULL COLD mark. 4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start the engine and let it run until the engine coolant temperature gage indicates approximately 195°F (90°C). By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank until the level reaches the FULL COLD mark. 5. Replace the pressure cap. Be sure the pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated. 6. Verify coolant level after engine is shut off and the coolant is cold. If necessary, repeat coolant fill procedure Steps 1 through 6. Notice: If the pressure cap is not [...]
-
Page 445
You may decide not to lift the hood when this warning appears, but instead get service help right away. See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-7 . If you do decide to lift the hood, make sure the vehicle is parked on a level surface. Then check to see if the engine cooling fans are running. If the engine is overheating, both fans should be running. If they are not, do not continue to run the engine and have the vehicle serviced. Notice: Engine damage from running your engine without coolant is not covered by your warranty. See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 5-37 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency. Notice: If the engine catches fire while drivi[...]
-
Page 446
If No Steam Is Coming From The Engine Compartment The ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE or the ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE message, along with a low coolant condition, can indicate a serious problem. If you get an engine overheat warning, but see or hear no steam, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you: • Climb a long hill on a hot day. • Stop after high-speed driving. • Idle for long periods in traff ic. • Tow a trailer. See Towing a Trailer on page 4-50 . If you get the ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE or the ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE message with no sign of steam, try this for a minute or so: 1. Turn the air conditioning off. 2. T[...]
-
Page 447
Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode If an overheated engine condition exists and the REDUCED ENGINE POWER message is displayed, an overheat protection mode which alternates firing groups of cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In this mode, you will notice a loss in power and engine performance. This operating mode allows the vehicle to be driven to a safe place in an emergency. Driving extended miles (km) and/or towing a trailer in the overheat protection mode should be avoided. Notice: After driving in the overheated engine protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage, allow the engine to cool before attempting any repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded. Repair th[...]
-
Page 448
Power Steering Fluid See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14 for reservoir location. When to Check Power Steering Fluid It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and repaired. How to Check Power Steering Fluid To check the power steering fluid: 1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment cool down. 2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean. 3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag. 4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it. 5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid leve[...]
-
Page 449
Windshield Washer Fluid What to Use When windshield washer fluid needs to be added, be sure to read the manufacturer’s instructions before use. Use a fluid that has suff icient protection against freezing in an area where the temperature may fall below freezing. Adding Washer Fluid The vehicle has a low washer fluid message in the DIC that comes on when the washer fluid is low. The message is displayed for 15 seconds at the start of each ignition cycle. When the WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID message displays, you will need to add washer fluid to the windshield washer fluid reservoir. Open the cap with the washer symbol on it. Add washer fluid until the tank is full. See Engine Compartm[...]
-
Page 450
Brakes Brake Fluid The brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14 for the location of the reservoir. There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down: • The brake fluid level goes down because of normal brake lining wear. When new linings are installed, the fluid level goes back up. • A fluid leak in the brake hydraulic system can also cause a low fluid level. Have the brake hydraulic system fixed, since a leak means that sooner or later the brakes will not work well. Do not top off the brake fluid. Adding fluid does not correct a leak. If fluid is added when the linings are [...]
-
Page 451
Checking Brake Fluid Check brake fluid by looking at the brake fluid reservoir. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14 . The fluid level should be above MIN. If it is not, have the brake hydraulic system checked to see if there is a leak. After work is done on the brake hydraulic system, make sure the level is above the MIN but not over the MAX mark. What to Add Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid from a sealed container. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-15 . Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area around the cap before removing it. This helps keep dirt from entering the reservoir. { CAUTION: With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake hydraulic system, th[...]
-
Page 452
Brake Wear This vehicle has front disc brakes and could have rear drum brakes or rear disc brakes. Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are needed. The sound can come and go or be heard all the time the vehicle is moving, except when applying the brake pedal firmly. { CAUTION: The brake wear warning sound means that soon the brakes will not work well. That could lead to an accident. When the brake wear warning sound is heard, have the vehicle serviced. Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake pads could result in costly brake repair. Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake squeal w[...]
-
Page 453
Replacing Brake System Parts The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well together if the vehicle is to have really good braking. The vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts. When parts of the braking system are replaced — for example, when the brake linings wear down and new ones are installed — be sure to get new approved replacement parts. If this is not done, the brakes might not work properly. For example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for the vehicle, the balance between the front and rear brakes can change — for the worse. The braking performance expected can change in many other ways if[...]
-
Page 454
Jump Starting If the vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode Hybrid manual for more information. If the vehicle’s battery (or batteries) has run down, you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely. { CAUTION: Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous because: • They contain acid that can burn you. • They contain gas that can explode or ignite. • They contain enough electricity to burn you. If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or all of these things can hurt you. Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to the vehicle that would not be covered by the warranty. [...]
-
Page 455
3. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching each other. If they are, it could cause an unwanted ground connection. You would not be able to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could damage the electrical systems. To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the jump start procedure. Put the automatic transmission in P (Park) or a manual transmission in Neutral before setting the parking brake. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear, not in Neutral. Notice: If you leave the radio or other accessories on during the ju[...]
-
Page 456
The remote negative (-) terminal is a stud located on the right front passenger side of the engine, where the negative battery cable attaches. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14 . { CAUTION: An electric fan can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan. { CAUTION: Using a match near a battery can cause battery gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this, and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if you need more light. Be sure the battery has enough water. You do not need to add water to the battery installed in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be sure the right a[...]
-
Page 457
{ CAUTION: Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts once the engine is running. 6. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock. The vehicles could be damaged too. Before you connect the cables, here are some basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. Negative ( − ) will go to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote negative ( − ) terminal if the vehicle has one. Do not connect positive (+) to negative ( − )o ry o u will get a short that would damage the battery and maybe other p[...]
-
Page 458
10. Connect the other end of the negative ( − ) cable to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to the remote negative ( − ) terminal, on the vehicle with the dead battery. 11. Start the vehicle with the good battery and run the engine for a while. 12. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs service. Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always connect and remove the jumper cables in the correct order, making sure that the cables do not touch each other or other metal. A. [...]
-
Page 459
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles do the following: 1. Disconnect the black negative ( − ) cable from the vehicle that had the bad battery. 2. Disconnect the black negative ( − ) cable from the vehicle with the good battery. 3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the vehicle with the good battery. 4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other vehicle. 5. Return the positive (+) terminal cover, to its original position. Rear Axle When to Check Lubricant It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem. Have it inspected and repaired. All axle ass[...]
-
Page 460
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a level surface. • For all 4.3L, 4.8L and 5.3L 1500 Series applications, the proper level is 0.04 inches to 0.75 inches (1.0 mm to 19.0 mm) below the bottom of the filler hole, located on the rear axle. Add only enough fluid to reach the proper level. • For all 6.0L and 6.2L 1500 Series applications, the proper level is from 0.6 inches to 1.6 inches (15 mm to 40 mm) below the bottom of the filler plug hole, located on the rear axle. Add only enough fluid to reach the proper level. • For all 6.0L and 6.2L 2500HD Series applications, the proper level is from 0 to 0.5 inches (0 mm to 13 mm) below the bottom of the filler plug hole,[...]
-
Page 461
How to Check Lubricant A. Fill Plug B. Drain Plug A. Fill Plug B. Drain Plug Electric Shift Transfer Case Manual Shift Transfer Case 5-51[...]
-
Page 462
A. Fill Plug B. Drain Plug To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a level surface. If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole, located on the transfer case, you will need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole. Use care not to overtighten the plug. When to Change Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to change the lubricant. See Scheduled Maintenance (Gasoline Engine) on page 6-4 . What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-15 . Front Axle When to Check and Change Lubricant It is[...]
-
Page 463
A: Fill Plug B: Drain Plug A: Fill Plug B: Drain Plug • When the differential is cold, add enough lubricant to raise the level from 0 (0 mm) to 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) below the filler plug hole. • When the differential is at operating temperature (warm), add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole. 1500 Series All except 1500 Series 5-53[...]
-
Page 464
What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-15 . Noise Control System Tampering with Noise Control System Prohibited The following information relates to compliance with federal noise emission standards for vehicles with a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) of more than 10,000 lbs (4 536 kg). The Maintenance Schedule provides information on maintaining the noise control system to minimize degradation of the noise emission control system during the life of your vehicle. The noise control system warranty is given in your warranty booklet. These standards apply only to vehicles sold in the United State[...]
-
Page 465
Fan and Drive: • Removal of fan clutch, if the vehicle has one, or rendering clutch inoperative. • Removal of the fan shroud, if the vehicle has one. Air Intake: • Removal of the air cleaner silencer. • Modification of the air cleaner. Exhaust: • Removal of the muff ler and/or resonator. • Removal of the exhaust pipes and exhaust pipe clamps. Headlamp Aiming The vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aiming system. The aim of the headlamps have been preset at the factory and should need no further adjustment. However, if the vehicle is damaged in a crash, the aim of the headlamps can be affected and adjustment can be necessary. If oncoming vehicles flash their high beams at you,[...]
-
Page 466
Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle’s low-beam headlamps. The high-beam headlamps will be correctly aimed if the low-beam headlamps are aimed properly. To adjust the vertical aim: 1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 5-13 for more information. 2. Locate the aim dot on the lens of the low-beam headlamp. 3. Record the distance from the ground to the aim dot on the low-beam headlamp. 4. At a wall measure from the ground upward (A) to the recorded distance from Step 3 and mark it. 5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B) on the wall or flat surface the width of the vehicle at the height of the mark in Step 4. Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improve beam cut-off when aiming. Coverin[...]
-
Page 467
7. Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws, which are under the hood near each headlamp assembly. The adjustment screw can be turned with a E8 Torx ® socket. 8. Turn the vertical aiming screw until the headlamp beam is aimed to the horizontal tape line. Turn it clockwise or counterclockwise to raise or lower the angle of the beam. 9. Make sure that the light from the headlamp is positioned at the bottom edge of the horizontal tape line. The lamp on the left (A) shows the correct headlamp aim. The lamp on the right (B) shows the incorrect headlamp aim. 10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for the opposite headlamp. 5-57[...]
-
Page 468
Bulb Replacement For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on page 5-63 . For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this section, contact your dealer/retailer. Halogen Bulbs { CAUTION: Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bulb package. Headlamps To replace one of these bulbs: 1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 5-13 for more information. 2. If you are replacing the bulb on the passenger side remove the Engine Air Cleaner cover. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-19 for more information. 3. Reach in and access the bulb soc[...]
-
Page 469
4. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it from the headlamp assembly and pull it straight out. 5. Unplug the electrical connector from the old bulb by releasing the clips on the bulb socket. 6. Replace it with a new bulb socket. 7. Plug in the electrical connector to the new bulb socket. 8. Reinstall the new bulb socket into the headlamp assembly and turn it clockwise to secure. 9. Close the hood. Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) and Cargo Lamp To replace one of these bulbs: 1. Remove the screws and lift off the lamp assembly. 5-59[...]
-
Page 470
A. Cargo Lamp B. Center High-Mounted Stoplamp Bulb (CHMSL) 2. Remove the bulbs by turning socket counterclockwise and pulling the bulb straight out. 3. Install the bulbs by pushing the bulb straight in and turning clockwise. 4. Reinstall the lamp assembly and tighten the screws. Pickup Box Identification and Fender Marker Lamps To replace a pickup box identification or fender marker lamp bulb: 1. Press the tab from the back to remove the lamp. 2. Unplug the lamp assembly harness. 3. Gently pry the individual lamp from the lamp assembly. 4. Unplug the lamp. 5. Plug in a new lamp and snap it into the assembly. 6. Reinstall the lamp assembly. 5-60[...]
-
Page 471
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps To replace one of these bulbs: 1. Open the tailgate. Tailgate on page 2-12 for more information. 2. Remove the two rear lamp assembly screws near the tailgate latch strikerpost and pull out the lamp assembly. 3. Determine which of the following taillamp assemblies applies to your vehicle. A. Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn Signal Lamp B. Back-up Lamp C. Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn Signal Lamp 4. Press the tab, if the vehicle has one, and turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it from the taillamp assembly. Dually Models 5-61[...]
-
Page 472
A. Stoplamp/Taillamp/ Turn Signal Lamp B. Stoplamp/Taillamp/ Turn Signal Lamp C. Back-up Lamp D. Sidemarker Lamp 5. Pull the old bulb straight out from the socket. 6. Press a new bulb into the socket and turn the socket clockwise into the taillamp assembly. 7. Reinstall the taillamp assembly. Taillamps (Chassis Cab Models) A. Backup Lamp B. Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn Signal Lamp To replace one of these bulbs: 1. Remove the four screws. 2. Lift the lens off the lamp assembly. 3. Turn the old bulb counterclockwise and pull the it straight out from the socket. 4. Install a new bulb into the socket, turn it clockwise, and press it in until it is tight. 5. Reinstall the lens and the four screws. All [...]
-
Page 473
License Plate Lamp To replace one of these bulbs: 1. Reach under the rear bumper for the bulb socket. 2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull the bulb socket out of the connector. 3. Pull the old bulb from the bulb socket, keeping the bulb straight as you pull it out. 4. Install the new bulb. 5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the bulb socket. Replacement Bulbs Exterior Lamp Bulb Number Back-up Lamp 3047 Back-up Lamp* 1156 Cargo Lamp and Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) 912 Fender Marker Lamp W5WLL High-Beam Headlamp 9005 Low-Beam Headlamp H11 License Plate Lamp 168 Sidemarker Lamp/Stoplamp/ Taillamp/Turn Signal Lamp 3047 Stoplamp/Turn Signal Lamp/Taillamp* 1157 * Chassi[...]
-
Page 474
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance (Gasoline Engine) on page 6-4 for more information on wiper blade inspection. Replacement blades come in different types and are removed in different ways. Here is how to remove the wiper blade: 1. Pull the windshield wiper arm connector away from the windshield. 2. Squeeze the grooved areas on each side of the blade and turn the blade assembly away from the arm connector. 3. Install the new blade onto the arm connector and make sure the grooved areas are fully set in the locked position. For the proper type and size, see Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 6-17 . [...]
-
Page 475
{ CAUTION: Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous. • Overloading your vehicle’s tires can cause overheating as a result of too much flexing. You could have an air-out and a serious accident. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-32 . • Underinflated tires pose the same danger as overloaded tires. The resulting accident could cause serious injury. Check all tires frequently to maintain the recommended pressure. Tire pressure should be checked when your vehicle’s tires are cold. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-73 . • Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden impact — such as when you hit a pothole. Keep tires at the re[...]
-
Page 476
Tire Sidewall Labeling Useful information about a tire is molded into the sidewall. The following illustrations are examples of a typical P-Metric and a LT-Metric tire sidewall. (A) Tire Size : The tire size code is a combination of letters and numbers used to define a particular tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type, and service description. See the “Tire Size” illustration later in this section for more detail. (B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria Specification) : Original equipment tires designed to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guid[...]
-
Page 477
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit : Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load. For information on recommended tire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-73 and Loading the Vehicle on page 4-32 . (A) Tire Size : The tire size code is a combination of letters and numbers used to define a particular tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type, and service description. See the “Tire Size” illustration later in this section for more detail. (B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria Specification) : Original equipment tires designed to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto t[...]
-
Page 478
(E) Tire Identification Number (TIN) : The letters and numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although only one side may have the date of manufacture. (F) Tire Ply Material : The type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread. (G) Single Tire Maximum Load : Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load when used as a single. For information on recommended tire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-73 and Loading the Vehicle on page 4-32 . Tire Size [...]
-
Page 479
(C) Aspect Ratio : A two-digit number that indicates the tire height-to-width measurements. For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 75, as shown in item C of the tire illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall is 75 percent as high as it is wide. (D) Construction Code : A letter code is used to indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The letter R means radial ply construction; the letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter B means belted-bias ply construction. (E) Rim Diameter : Diameter of the wheel in inches. (F) Service Description : These characters represent the load index and speed rating of the tire. The load index represents the load[...]
-
Page 480
(D) Construction Code : A letter code is used to indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The letter R means radial ply construction; the letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter B means belted-bias ply construction. (E) Rim Diameter : Diameter of the wheel in inches. (F) Load Range : Load Range. (G) Service Description : The service description indicates the load index and speed rating of a tire. If two numbers are given as in the example, 120/116, then this represents the load index for single versus dual wheel usage (single/dual). The speed rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified to carry a load. Tire Terminology and Definitions Air Pressure : T[...]
-
Page 481
GVWR : Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-32 . GAWR FRT : Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-32 . GAWR RR : Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-32 . Intended Outboard Sidewall : The side of an asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle. Kilopascal (kPa) : The metric unit for air pressure. Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire : A tire used on light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles. Load Index : An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire. Maximum Inflation Pressure : The maximum air [...]
-
Page 482
Radial Ply Tire : A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread. Rim : A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire beads are seated. Sidewall : The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead. Speed Rating : An alphanumeric code assigned to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire can operate. Traction : The friction between the tire and the road surface. The amount of grip provided. Tread : The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road. Treadwear Indicators : Narrow bands, sometimes called wear bars, that show across the tread of a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.[...]
-
Page 483
Inflation - Tire Pressure Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate effectively. Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is not. If your tires do not have enough air (under-inflation), you can get the following: • Too much flexing • Too much heat • Tire overloading • Premature or irregular wear • Poor handling • Reduced fuel economy If your tires have too much air (over-inflation), you can get the following: • Unusual wear • Poor handling • Rough ride • Needless damage from road hazards A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows your vehicle’[...]
-
Page 484
How to Check Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they’re underinflated. Check the tire’s inflation pressure when the tires are cold. Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km). Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches the recommended pressure on the tire and loading information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the pressure is low, add ai[...]
-
Page 485
Dual Tire Operation When the vehicle is new, or whenever a wheel, wheel bolt or wheel nut is replaced, check the wheel nut torque after 100, 1,000 and 6,000 miles (160, 1 600 and 10 000 km) of driving. For proper torque and wheel nut tightening information, see Removing the Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-93 . The outer tire on a dual wheel setup generally wears faster than the inner tire. Your tires will wear more evenly and last longer if you rotate the tires periodically, see Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5-80 . Also see Scheduled Maintenance (Gasoline Engine) on page 6-4 . { CAUTION: If you operate your vehicle with a tire that is badly underinflated, the tire can overheat. An ove[...]
-
Page 486
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists[...]
-
Page 487
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). The TPMS is designed to warn the driver when a low tire pressure condition exists. TPMS sensors are mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly, excluding the spare tire and wheel assembly. The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in the vehicle’s tires and transmits the tire pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle. When a low tire pressure condition is detected, the TPMS will illuminate the low tire pressure warning symbol located on the instrument panel cluster. At the same time a message to check the pressure in a specific tire appears on the Driver Information Center (DIC) displa[...]
-
Page 488
TPMS Malfunction Light and Message The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning message is also displayed. The low tire warning light and DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the problem is corrected. Some of the conditions that can cause the malfunction light and DIC message to come on are: • One of the road tires has been replaced with the spare tire. The spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor. The TPMS malfunction light and DIC message should go off[...]
-
Page 489
TPMS Sensor Matching Process Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code. Any time you rotate your vehicle’s tires or replace one or more of the TPMS sensors, the identification codes will need to be matched to the new tire/wheel position. The sensors are matched to the tire/wheel positions in the following order: driver side front tire, passenger side front tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your dealer/retailer for service. The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each tire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire’s air pressure. If increasing the tire’s air pressure, do not exceed the maximum inflation press[...]
-
Page 490
5. Remove the valve cap from the valve cap stem. Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or decreasing the tire’s air pressure for five seconds, or until a horn chirp sounds. The horn chirp, which may take up to 30 seconds to sound, confirms that the sensor identification code has been matched to this tire and wheel position. 6. Proceed to the passenger side front tire, and repeat the procedure in Step 5. 7. Proceed to the passenger side rear tire, and repeat the procedure in Step 5. 8. Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat the procedure in Step 5. The horn sounds two times to indicate the sensor identification code has been matched to the driver side rear tire, and that the [...]
-
Page 491
If your vehicle has single rear wheels and the tread design for the front tires is the same as the rear tires, use the rotation pattern shown here when rotating the tires. If your vehicle has dual rear wheels and the tread design for the front tires is the same as the rear tires, always use one of the correct rotation patterns shown here when rotating the tires. 5-81[...]
-
Page 492
If your vehicle has dual rear wheels and the tread design for the front tires is different from the dual rear tires, always use the correct rotation pattern shown here when rotating the tires. The dual tires are rotated as a pair, and the inside rear tires become the outside rear tires. When you install dual wheels, be sure the vent holes in the inner and outer wheels on each side are lined up. After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-73 and Loading the Vehicle on page 4-32 . Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” u[...]
-
Page 493
When It Is Time for New Tires Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures, driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions, influence when you need new tires. One way to tell when it is time for new tires is to check the treadwear indicators, which appear when your tires have only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or less of tread remaining. Some commercial truck tires may not have treadwear indicators. You need new tires if any of the following statements are true: • You can see the indicators at three or more places around the tire. • You can see cord or fabric showing through the tire’s rubber. • The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric. ?[...]
-
Page 494
Buying New Tires GM has developed and matched specific tires for your vehicle. The original equipment tires installed on your vehicle, when it was new, were designed to meet General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC spec) system rating. If you need replacement tires, GM strongly recommends that you get tires with the same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed to give the same performance and vehicle safety, during normal use, as the original tires. GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a dozen critical specifications that impact the overall performance of your vehicle, including brake system performance, ride and [...]
-
Page 495
{ CAUTION: If you use bias-ply tires on the vehicle, the wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the wheels on the vehicle. If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those that do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size, load range, speed rating, and construction type (radial and bias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s original tires. Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system could give an inaccurate low-pressure warning if non-TPC Spec rated tires are installed on your vehicle. Non-TPC Spec rated tires may give a low-pressure warning that[...]
-
Page 496
Dif ferent Size Tires and Wheels If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than your original equipment wheels and tires, this could affect the way your vehicle performs, including its braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability, and resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle has electronic systems such as anti-lock brakes, rollover airbags, traction control, and electronic stability control, the performance of these systems can be affected. { CAUTION: If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle may not provide an acceptable level of performance and safety if tires not recommended for those wheels are selected. You may increase the chance that you will cra[...]
-
Page 497
Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate. Traction – AA, A, B, C The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as [...]
-
Page 498
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance. Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessary on a regular basis. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or the other, the alignment might need to be checked. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, the tires and wheels might need to be rebalanced. See your dealer/retailer for proper diagnosis. Wheel Replacement Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wh[...]
-
Page 499
CAUTION: (Continued) lose control. You could have a collision in which you or others could be injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for replacement. Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain clearance to the body and chassis. Whenever a wheel, wheel bolt or wheel nut is replaced on a dual wheel setup, check the wheel nut torque after 100, 1,000 and 6,000 miles (160, 1 600 and 10 000 km) of driving. For proper torque, see “Wheel Nut Torque” under Capacities and Specifications on page 5-129 . See Changing a [...]
-
Page 500
Tire Chains { CAUTION: If your vehicle has dual wheels or P265/65R18, P275/55R20 or LT265/70R17 size tires, do not use tire chains. They can damage your vehicle because there is not enough clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle without the proper amount of clearance can cause damage to the brakes, suspension, or other vehicle parts. The area damaged by the tire chains could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and you or others may be injured in a crash. Use another type of traction device only if its manufacturer recommends it for use on your vehicle and tire size combination and road conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s instructions. CAUTION: (Continued) CAUTION: (Continued) To [...]
-
Page 501
If a Tire Goes Flat It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving, especially if you maintain your vehicle’s tires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do: If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to a stop well out of the traff ic lane. A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a skid and may require the same correction you would use in a skid. In [...]
-
Page 502
Changing a Flat Tire If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3-8 . { CAUTION: Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you or other people. You and they could be badly injured or even killed. Find a level place to change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving: 1. Set the parking brake firmly. 2. Put the shift lever in P (Park). 3. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear — not in N (Neutral). 4. Turn off the engine and do not restart while the vehicle is ra[...]
-
Page 503
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools A. Wing Nut Retaining Tool Kit B. Tool Kit C. Wheel Blocks D. Jack E. Jack Knob F. Wing Nut Retaining Wheel Blocks A. Wing Nut Retaining Tool Kit B. Tool Kit C. Wheel Blocks D. Jack E. Jack Knob F. Wing Nut Retaining Wheel Blocks Crew Cab Regular Cab 5-93[...]
-
Page 504
A. Wing Nut Retaining Tool Kit B. Tool Kit C. Wheel Blocks D. Jack E. Jack Knob For regular cab models, the equipment you will need is behind the passenger’s seat. For extended and crew cab models, the equipment is on the shelf behind the passenger’s side second row seat. 1. Turn the knob on the jack counterclockwise to lower the jack head to release the jack from its holder. 2. Remove the wheel blocks and the wheel block retainer by turning the wing nut counterclockwise. 3. Remove the wing nut used to retain the storage bag and tools by turning it counterclockwise. You will use the jack handle extensions and the wheel wrench to remove the underbody-mounted spare tire. Extended Cab 5-94[...]
-
Page 505
A. Spare Tire (Valve Stem Pointed Down) B. Hoist Assembly C. Hoist Cable D. Tire/Wheel Retainer E. Hoist Shaft F. Hoist End of Extension Tool G. Hoist Shaft Access Hole H. Wheel Wrench I. Jack Handle Extensions J. Spare Tire Lock (If equipped) 1. Open the spare tire lock cover on the bumper and use the ignition key to remove the spare tire lock (J). To remove the spare tire lock, insert the ignition key turn and pull straight out. 2. Assemble the wheel wrench (H) and the two jack handle extensions (I) as shown. 5-95[...]
-
Page 506
3. Insert the hoist end (open end) (F) of the extension through the hole (G) in the rear bumper. Do not use the chiseled end of the wheel wrench. Be sure the hoist end of the extension (F) connects to the hoist shaft (E). The ribbed square end of the extension is used to lower the spare tire. 4. Turn the wheel wrench (H) counterclockwise to lower the spare tire to the ground. Continue to turn the wheel wrench until the spare tire can be pulled out from under the vehicle. If the spare tire does not lower to the ground, the secondary latch is engaged causing the tire not to lower. See Secondary Latch System on page 5-105 . 5. Use the wheel wrench hook which allows you to pull the hoist cable t[...]
-
Page 507
6. Tilt the tire toward the vehicle with some slack in the cable to access the tire/wheel retainer. Separate the retainer from the guide pin by sliding the retainer up the pin while pressing down on the latch. Once the retainer is separated from the guide pin, tilt the retainer and pull it through the center of the wheel along with the cable and guide latch. 7. Put the spare tire near the flat tire. 5-97[...]
-
Page 508
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire Use the following pictures and instructions to remove the flat tire and raise the vehicle. The tools you will be using include the jack (A), the wheel blocks (B), the jack handle (C), the jack handle extensions (D), and the wheel wrench (E). 1. Do a safety check before proceeding. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-92 for more information. 2. If your vehicle has wheel nut caps, loosen them by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise. If the vehicle has a center cap with wheel nut caps, the wheel nut caps are designed to stay with the center cap after they are loosened. Remove the entire center cap. 5-98[...]
-
Page 509
If the wheel has a smooth center cap, place the chisel end of the wheel wrench in the slot on the wheel, and gently pry it out. 3. Use the wheel wrench and turn it counterclockwise to loosen the wheel nuts. Do not remove the wheel nuts yet. 5-99[...]
-
Page 510
4. Position the jack under the vehicle as shown. If the flat tire is on the front of the vehicle (1500 Model vehicles), position the jack under the bracket attached to the vehicle’s frame, behind the flat tire. If the flat tire is on the front of the vehicle (all other models), position the jack on the frame behind the flat tire. If the flat tire is on the rear, for 1500 models position the jack under the rear axle about 2 inches (5 cm) inboard of the shock absorber bracket; for all other models, position the jack under the rear axle between the spring anchor and the shock absorber bracket. If you have added a snow plow to the front of your vehicle, lower the snow plow fully before ra[...]
-
Page 511
{ CAUTION: Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack. { CAUTION: Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly positioned can damage the vehicle and even make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head into the proper location before raising the vehicle. 5. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the vehicle. Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough room for the spare tire to fit under the wheel well. 6. Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire. 5[...]
-
Page 512
{ CAUTION: Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose after time. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. When changing a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-92 . 7. Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts, mounting surfaces, and spare wheel. 8. Install the spare tire. { CAUTION: Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because the nuts might come loose. The vehicle’s wheel could fall off, c[...]
-
Page 513
{ CAUTION: If wheel studs are damaged, they can break. If all the studs on a wheel broke, the wheel could come off and cause a crash. If any stud is damaged because of a loose-running wheel, it could be that all of the studs are damaged. To be sure, replace all studs on the wheel. If the stud holes in a wheel have become larger, the wheel could collapse in CAUTION: (Continued) CAUTION: (Continued) operation. Replace any wheel if its stud holes have become larger or distorted in any way. Inspect hubs and hub-piloted wheels for damage. Because of loose running wheels, piloting pad damage may occur and require replacement of the entire hub, for proper centering of the wheels. When replacing stu[...]
-
Page 514
{ CAUTION: Wheel nuts that are improperly or incorrectly tightened can cause the wheels to become loose or come off. The wheel nuts should be tightened with a torque wrench to the proper torque specification after replacing. Follow the torque specification supplied by the aftermarket manufacturer when using accessory locking wheel nuts. See Capacities and Specifications on page 5-129 for original equipment wheel nut torque specifications. Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque specification. See Capacities and Specifications on p[...]
-
Page 515
Secondary Latch System Your vehicle has an underbody-mounted tire hoist assembly equipped with a secondary latch system. It is designed to stop the spare tire from suddenly falling off your vehicle. For the secondary latch to work, the spare must be installed with the valve stem pointing down. See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-108 . { CAUTION: Before beginning this procedure read all the instructions. Failure to read and follow the instructions could damage the hoist assembly and you and others could get hurt. Read and follow the instructions listed next. To release the spare tire from the secondary latch: 1. Check under the vehicle to see if the cable end is visible. If t[...]
-
Page 516
6. Stand the wheel blocks on their shortest ends, with the backs facing each other. 7. Place the bottom edge of the jack (A) on the wheel blocks (B), separating them so that the jack is balanced securely. 8. Attach the jack handle, extension, and wheel wrench to the jack and place it (with the wheel blocks) under the vehicle toward the front of the rear bumper. 5-106[...]
-
Page 517
9. Position the center lift point of the jack under the center of the spare tire. 10. Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the jack until it lifts the end fitting. 11. Continue raising the jack until the spare tire stops moving upward and is held firmly in place. The secondary latch has released and the spare tire is balancing on the jack. 12. Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until the spare tire slides off the jack or is hanging by the cable. { CAUTION: Someone standing too close during the procedure could be injured by the jack. If the spare tire does not slide off the jack completely, make sure no one is behind you or on either side of yo[...]
-
Page 518
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools { CAUTION: Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment could strike someone. Store all these in the proper place. Notice: Storing an aluminum wheel with a flat tire under your vehicle for an extended period of time or with the valve stem pointing up can damage the wheel. Always stow the wheel with the valve stem pointing down and have the wheel/tire repaired as soon as possible. Store the tire under the rear of the vehicle in the spare tire carrier. A. Flat or Spare Tire (Valve Stem Pointed Down) B. Hoist Assembly C. Hoist Cable D. Tire/Wheel R[...]
-
Page 519
1. Put the tire on the ground at the rear of the vehicle with the valve stem pointed down, and to the rear. 2. Separate the tire/wheel retainer (D) from the guide pin. Pull the pin through the center of the wheel. Tilt the retainer down and through the center wheel opening. Make sure the retainer is fully seated across the underside of the wheel. 3. Attach the wheel wrench (H) and extensions (I) together, as shown. 5-109[...]
-
Page 520
4. Insert the hoist end (F) through the hole (G) in the rear bumper and onto the hoist shaft. Do not use the chiseled end of the wheel wrench. 5. Raise the tire part way upward. Make sure the retainer is seated in the wheel opening. 6. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench clockwise until you hear two clicks or feel it skip twice. You cannot overtighten the cable. 7. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull (A), and then try to turn (B) the tire. If the tire moves, use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable. 8. Reinstall the spare tire lock, if the vehicle has one. 5-110[...]
-
Page 521
To store the jack and jack tools: A. Wing Nut Retaining Wheel Blocks B. Wheel Blocks C. Wing Nut Retaining Tool Kit D. Wheel Wrench and Extensions E. Tool Bag F. Jack Mounting Bracket G. Jack H. Bolt Retaining Wheel Blocks 1. Put the tools (D) in the tool bag (E) and place them in the retaining bracket (C). 2. Tighten down the wing nut (C). 3. Assemble the wheel blocks (B) and jack (G) together with the wing nut (A) and retaining bolt (H). 4. Position the jack (G) in the mounting bracket (F). Position the holes in the base of the jack (G) onto the pin in the mounting bracket (F). 5. Return them to their original location in the vehicle. For more information, refer to Removing the Spare Tire [...]
-
Page 522
Spare Tire Your vehicle, when new, had a fully-inflated spare tire. A spare tire may lose air over time, so check its inflation pressure regularly. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-73 and Loading the Vehicle on page 4-32 for information regarding proper tire inflation and loading your vehicle. For instruction on how to remove, install or store a spare tire, see Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire on page 5-98 and Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-108 . Notice: If the vehicle has four-wheel drive and the different size spare tire is installed on the vehicle, do not drive in four-wheel drive until you can have your flat tire repaired and/or replaced.[...]
-
Page 523
Appearance Care Interior Cleaning The vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it is cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and dirt can accumulate on the upholstery. Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from the upholstery. It is important to keep the upholstery from becoming and remaining heavily soiled. Soils should be removed as quickly as possible. The vehicle’s interior may experience extremes of heat that could cause stains to set rapidly. Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments that transfer color to home furnishings m[...]
-
Page 524
Do not clean the vehicle using: • A knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil from any interior surface. • A stiff brush. It can cause damage to the vehicle’s interior surfaces. • Heavy pressure or aggressive rubbing with a cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure can damage the interior and does not improve the effectiveness of soil removal. • Laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers can leave residue that streaks and attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide. Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. • Too much cleaner that saturates the upholstery. • Organic solvents such as naptha, alcohol, etc. that can damage[...]
-
Page 525
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner or spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally cleaned area gives any impression that a ring formation may result, clean the entire surface. After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the fabric or carpet. Leather A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary, a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry. Never use steam to clean lea[...]
-
Page 526
Care of Safety Belts Keep belts clean and dry. { CAUTION: Do not bleach or dye safety belts. It may severely weaken them. In a crash, they might not be able to provide adequate protection. Clean safety belts only with mild soap and lukewarm water. Weatherstrips Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold, damp weather frequent application may be required. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-15 . Washing Your Vehicle The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keep it clean by washing it often. Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can damage the e[...]
-
Page 527
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting. High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer than 12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle. Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and decals. Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses. Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-116 . Finish Care Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint fin[...]
-
Page 528
Windshield and Wiper Blades Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner. Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly when cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause wiper streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they are worn or damaged. Wipers can be damaged by: • Extreme dusty conditions • Sand and salt • Heat and sun • Snow and ice, without proper removal Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels and Trim The vehicle may have either aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mi[...]
-
Page 529
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because they could damage the surface. Do not use chrome polish on aluminum wheels. Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels could damage the wheels. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only. Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff of f immediately after application. Notice: Driving the vehicle through an automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning b[...]
-
Page 530
Finish Damage Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair expense. Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up materials available from your dealer/retailer. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your dealer’s/retailer’s body and paint shop. Underbody Maintenance Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control can collect on the underbody. If these are not removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan, and exhaust system even though they have corrosion protection. At least every spring, ?[...]
-
Page 531
Vehicle Identification Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) This is the legal identifier for the vehicle. It appears on a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on the driver side. It can be seen through the windshield from outside the vehicle. The VIN also appears on the Certification/Tire and Service Parts labels and the certificates of title and registration. Engine Identification The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code. This code helps identify the vehicle’s engine, specifications, and replacement parts. See “Engine Specifications” under Capacities and Specifications on page 5-129 for the vehicle’s engine code. Service Parts Identification Label Th[...]
-
Page 532
Windshield Wiper Fuses The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical problem and not snow, etc., be sure to get it fixed. Power Windows and Other Power Options Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other power accessories. If the current load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and then closes after a cool down period, protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away. Fuses and Circuit Breakers If the vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode Hybrid manual for more information. The wiring[...]
-
Page 533
The vehicle may not use all of the fuses shown. Fuses Usage 1 Rear Seats 2 Rear Accessory Power Outlet 3 Steering Wheel Controls Backlight 4 Driver Door Module 5 Dome Lamps, Driver Side Turn Signal Fuses Usage 6 Driver Side Turn Signal, Stoplamp 7 Instrument Panel Back Lighting 8 Passenger Side Turn Signal, Stoplamp 9 Passenger Door Module, Driver Unlock 10 Power Door Lock 2 (Unlock Feature) 11 Power Door Lock 2 (Lock Feature) 12 Stoplamps, Center-High Mounted Stoplamp 13 Rear Climate Controls 14 Power Mirror 15 Body Control Module (BCM) 16 Accessory Power Outlets 17 Interior Lamps 18 Power Door Lock 1 (Unlock Feature) 19 Rear Seat Entertainment 20 Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist, Power Liftg[...]
-
Page 534
Fuses Usage 24 Cooled Seats 25 Driver Seat Module, Remote Keyless Entry System 26 Driver Power Door Lock (Unlock Feature) Circuit Breaker Usage LT DR Driver Side Power Window Circuit Breaker Harness Connector Usage LT DR Driver Door Harness Connection BODY Harness Connector BODY Harness Connector Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block The center instrument panel fuse block is located underneath the instrument panel, to the left of the steering column. Top View Harness Connector Usage BODY 2 Body Harness Connector 2 BODY 1 Body Harness Connector 1 BODY 3 Body Harness Connector 3 5-124[...]
-
Page 535
Harness Connector Usage HEADLINER 3 Headliner Harness Connector 3 HEADLINER 2 Headliner Harness Connector 2 HEADLINER 1 Headliner Harness Connector 1 SEO/UPFITTER Special Equipment Option Upfitter Harness Connector Circuit Breaker Usage CB1 Passenger Side Power Window Circuit Breaker CB2 Passenger Seat Circuit Breaker CB3 Driver Seat Circuit Breaker CB4 Rear Sliding Window Underhood Fuse Block If the vehicle has the DURAMAX ® Diesel engine, see the DURAMAX ® Diesel manual for more information. If the vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode Hybrid manual for more information. The underhood fuse block is located in the engine compartment, on the driver side of the vehicle. Lift the c[...]
-
Page 536
Fuses Usage 1 Right Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp 2 Electronic Suspension Control, Automatic Level Control Exhaust 3 Left Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp 4 Engine Controls Fuses Usage 5 Engine Control Module, Throttle Control 6 Trailer Brake Controller 7 Front Washer 8 Oxygen Sensor 9 Antilock Brakes System 2 10 Trailer Back-up Lamps 11 Driver Side Low-Beam Headlamp 12 Engine Control Module (Battery) 13 Fuel Injectors, Ignition Coils (Right Side) 14 Transmission Control Module (Battery) 15 Vehicle Back-up Lamps 16 Passenger Side Low-Beam Headlamp 17 Air Conditioning Compressor 18 Oxygen Sensors 19 Transmission Controls (Ignition) 20 Fuel Pump 21 Fuel System Control Module 22 Not Used 5-126[...]
-
Page 537
Fuses Usage 23 Not Used 24 Fuel Injectors, Ignition Coils (Left Side) 25 Trailer Park Lamps 26 Driver Side Park Lamps 27 Passenger Side Park Lamps 28 Fog Lamps 29 Horn 30 Passenger Side High-Beam Headlamp 31 Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) 32 Driver Side High-Beam Headlamp 33 Daytime Running Lights 2 34 Sunroof 35 Key Ignition System, Theft Deterrent System 36 Windshield Wiper 37 SEO B2 Upfitter Usage (Battery) 38 Electric Adjustable Pedals 39 Climate Controls (Battery) 40 Airbag System (Ignition) 41 Amplifier 42 Audio System Fuses Usage 43 Miscellaneous (Ignition), Cruise Control 44 Not Used 45 Airbag System (Battery) 46 Instrument Panel Cluster 47 Power Take-Off 48 Auxiliary Climate Control [...]
-
Page 538
J-Case Fuses Usage 60 Cooling Fan 2 61 Antilock Brake System 1 62 Starter 63 Stud 2 (Trailer Brakes) 64 Left Bussed Electrical Center 1 65 Not Used 66 Heated Windshield Washer System 67 Transfer Case 68 Stud 1 (Trailer Connector Battery Power) (Optional - 40A Fuse Required) 69 Mid-Bussed Electrical Center 1 70 Climate Control Blower 71 Not Used 72 Left Bussed Electrical Center 2 Relays Usage FAN HI Cooling Fan High Speed FAN LO Cooling Fan Low Speed FAN CNTRL Cooling Fan Control HDLP LO/HID Low-Beam Headlamp FOG LAMP Front Fog Lamps A/C CMPRSR Air Conditioning Compressor STRTR Starter PWR/TRN Powertrain FUEL PMP Fuel Pump PRK LAMP Parking Lamps REAR DEFOG Rear Defogger RUN/CRANK Switched Pow[...]
-
Page 539
Capacities and Specifications The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-15 for more information. If your vehicle has the DURAMAX ® Diesel engine, see the DURAMAX ® Diesel manual for more information. Application Capacities English Metric Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge amount, see the refrigerant caution label located under the hood. See your dealer for more information. Cooling System 4.3L V6 1500 Series 16.5 qt 15.6 L 4.8L V8 1500 Series 16.9 qt 16.0 L 5.3L V8 1500 Series 16.9 qt 16.0 L 6.0L V8 1500 Series 16.8 qt 15.9 L 6.0L V8 2500 Series and 35[...]
-
Page 540
Application Capacities English Metric Fuel Tank 1500 Series Standard and Short Box 26.0 gal 98.0 L 1500 Series Long Box 34.0 gal 128.7 L 2500 Series Standard Box 26.0 gal 98.0 L 2500 Series and 3500 Series Long Box 34.0 gal 128.7 L 3500 Series Chassis Cab 50.0 gal 189.0 L 3500 Chassis Cab – Front Tank 27.0 gal 102.0 L 3500 Chassis Cab – Rear Tank (if equipped) 23.0 gal 87.0 L Transmission Fluid (Pan Removal and Filter Replacement) Auto 4-Speed Transmission 4L60-E Electronic Transmission 5.0 qt 4.7 L Auto 6-Speed Transmission 6L80-E 6.0 qt 5.7 L Auto 6-Speed Transmission 6L90-E 6.3 qt 6.0 L Auto 6-Speed Transmission Allison 7.4 qt 7.0 L Transfer Case Fluid 1.6 qt 1.5 L Wheel Nut Torque 14[...]
-
Page 541
Engine Specifications Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap 4.3L V6 X Automatic 0.060 in (1.52 mm) 4.8L V8 C Automatic 0.040 in (1.01 mm) 5.3L V8 Flexible Fuel with Active Fuel Management™ (Iron Block) 0 Automatic 0.040 in (1.01 mm) 5.3L V8 Flexible Fuel with Active Fuel Management™ (Aluminum Block) 3 Automatic 0.040 in (1.01 mm) 5.3L V8 with Active Fuel Management™ (Iron Block) J Automatic 0.040 in (1.01 mm) 5.3L V8 with Active Fuel Management™ (Aluminum Block) M Automatic 0.040 in (1.01 mm) 6.0L V8 (Iron Block) K Automatic 0.040 in (1.01 mm) 6.0L V8 with Active Fuel Management™ (Aluminum Block) Y Automatic 0.040 in (1.01 mm) 6.2L V8 Flexible Fuel (Aluminum Block) 2 Automat[...]
-
Page 542
✍ NOTES 5-132[...]
-
Page 543
Maintenance Schedule ..................................... .6-2 Introduction .................................................. .6-2 Maintenance Requirements ............................. .6-2 Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... .6-2 Using the Maintenance Schedule ..................... .6-3 Scheduled Maintenance (Gasoline Engine) ........ .6-4 Additional Required Services ........................... .6-7 Maintenance Footnotes .................................. .6-9 Owner Checks and Services ......................... .6-11 At the First 100, 1,000 and 6,000 Miles (160, 1 600 and 10 000 km) ...................... .6-11 At Each Fuel Fill .........................................[...]
-
Page 544
Maintenance Schedule Introduction This maintenance section applies to vehicles with a gasoline engine. For diesel engine vehicles, see the maintenance schedule section in the DURAMAX Diesel manual. Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and change as recommended. Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan supplements the vehicle warranties. See the Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer/retailer for details. Maintenance Requirements Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections, replacement parts, and recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary to keep this vehicle in good working condition. Any damage caused by failure to[...]
-
Page 545
Using the Maintenance Schedule We want to help keep this vehicle in good working condition. But we do not know exactly how you will drive it. You might drive very short distances only a few times a week. Or you might drive long distances all the time in very hot, dusty weather. You might use the vehicle in making deliveries. Or you might drive it to work, to do errands, or in many other ways. Because of all the different ways people use their vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You might need more frequent checks and replacements. So please read the following and note how you drive. If you have any questions on how to keep the vehicle in good condition, see your dealer/retailer. This schedule [...]
-
Page 546
Owner Checks and Services on page 6-11 tells what should be checked, when to check it, and what can easily be done to help keep the vehicle in good condition. The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-15 and Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 6-17 . When the vehicle is serviced, make sure these are used. All parts should be replaced and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone else drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of genuine parts from your dealer/retailer. Scheduled Maintenance (Gasoline Engine) This maintenance section applies to vehicles with a gasoline engine. For diesel engine vehicles, see th[...]
-
Page 547
Scheduled Maintenance Service Maintenance I Maintenance II Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 5-15 . Reset oil life system. See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-18 . An Emission Control Service. •• Allison Transmission ® only: Replace external transmission filter at the first maintenance service performed on the vehicle. Lubricate chassis components. See footnote #. •• Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j). •• Inspect engine air cleaner filter or change indicator (if equipped). If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-19 . See footnote (p). • Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire In[...]
-
Page 548
Scheduled Maintenance (cont’d) Service Maintenance I Maintenance II Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” in this section. •• Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). • Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). • Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). • Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). • Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). • Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed. • Inspect shields, vehicles with diesel engine or with GVWR above 10,000 lbs (4 536 kg) only. See footnote (n). • 6-6[...]
-
Page 549
Additional Required Services This maintenance section applies to vehicles with a gasoline engine. If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see the maintenance schedule section in the DURAMAX ® Diesel manual. The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service ( I or II ) after the indicated miles (kilometers) shown for each item. Additional Required Services Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000 (40 000) 50,000 (80 000) 75,000 (120 000) 100,000 (160 000) 125,000 (200 000) 150,000 (240 000) Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks. • • ••• • Inspect exhaust system for loose or damaged components. • • ••• • Vehicles without a filter restriction ind[...]
-
Page 550
Additional Required Services (cont’d) Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000 (40 000) 50,000 (80 000) 75,000 (120 000) 100,000 (160 000) 125,000 (200 000) 150,000 (240 000) Four-wheel drive only: Change transfer case fluid (severe service). See footnotes (g) and (m). ••• Four-wheel drive only: Change transfer case fluid (normal service). See footnote (g). • Inspect evaporative control system. An Emission Control Service. See footnotes † and (k). ••• Replace spark plugs and inspect spark plug wires. An Emission Control Service. • Engine cooling system service (or every five years, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. See footnote (i). • Inspect engine[...]
-
Page 551
Maintenance Footnotes This maintenance section applies to vehicles with a gasoline engine. For diesel engine vehicles, see the maintenance schedule section in the DURAMAX ® Diesel manual. † The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however, urge that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded. # Lubricate the front suspension, steering linkage, and parking brake cable guides. Control arm ball joints o[...]
-
Page 552
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, body door hinges, hood latch assembly, secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor, release pawl, tailgate hinges, tailgate linkage, tailgate handle pivot points, latch bolt, fuel door hinge, locks, and folding seat hardware. More frequent lubrication may be required when exposed to a corrosive environment. Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. (g) Check vent hose at transfer case for kinks and proper installation. Check to be sure vent hose is unobstructed, clear, and free of debris. During any maintenance, if a power washer is used to clean mud and dirt from the underbo[...]
-
Page 553
(n) Vehicles with diesel engine or with GVWR above 10,000 lbs (4 536 kg) only: Inspect shields for damage or looseness. Adjust or replace as required. This is a Noise Emission Control Service. Applicable to vehicles sold in the United States and recommended for vehicles sold in Canada. (p) If driving regularly under dusty conditions, inspect the filter or change indicator (if equipped) at each engine oil change. (q) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary. Owner Checks and Services These owner checks and services should be performed at the intervals specified to help ensure vehicle safety, dependability, and emission control perform[...]
-
Page 554
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if necessary. At Least Once a Month Tire Inflation Check Inspect the vehicle’s tires and make sure they are inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to check the spare tire. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-73 . Check to make sure the spare tire is stored securely. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-92 . Tire Wear Inspection Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service notification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary, rotate the tires. See Tire Inspection and [...]
-
Page 555
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control System Check { CAUTION: When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or others could be injured. 1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level surface. 2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-50 . Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if the vehicle begins to move. 3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN, but do not start the engine. Without applying the regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of P (Park) with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out of P (Park), contact your dealer/[...]
-
Page 556
Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission P (Park) Mechanism Check { CAUTION: When you are doing this check, the vehicle could begin to move. You or others could be injured and property could be damaged. Make sure there is room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should the vehicle begin to move. Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the parking brake. • To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With the engine running and the transmission in N (Neutral), slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parkin[...]
-
Page 557
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants This maintenance section applies to vehicles with a gasoline engine. If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see the maintenance schedule section in the DURAMAX ® Diesel manual. Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer. Usage Fluid/Lubricant Engine Oil Engine oil which meets GM Standard GM6094M and displays the American Petroleum Institute Certified for Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. To determine the proper viscosity for your vehicle’s engine, see Engine Oil on page 5-15 . Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL ® coolant. See Engine Co[...]
-
Page 558
Usage Fluid/Lubricant Rear Axle SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 89021677, in Canada 89021678) meeting GM Specification 9986115. Transfer Case (Four-Wheel Drive) DEXRON ® -VI Automatic Transmission Fluid. Front Axle Propshaft Spline or One-Piece Propshaft Spline (Two-Wheel Drive with 4-Speed Auto. Trans.) Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 12345879, in Canada 10953511) or lubricant meeting requirements of GM 9985830. Rear Driveline Center Spline Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB. Usage Fluid/Lubricant Hood Hinges Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM P[...]
-
Page 559
Maintenance Replacement Parts Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer. If your vehicle has the DURAMAX ® diesel engine, see the DURAMAX ® Diesel manual for more information. Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number Engine Air Cleaner/Filter Standard Filter 15908916* A3086C* High Capacity Filter 15908915 A3085C Oil Filter 4.3L V6 25010792 PF47 4.8L V8; 5.3L V8; 6.0L V8; 6.2L V8 89017524 PF48 Spark Plugs 4.3L V6 12607234 41-993 4.8L V8; 5.3L V8; 6.0L V8; 6.2L V8 12609877 41-985 Wiper Blades – 21.6 in (55.0 cm) 25877402 — *15908915 (A3085C) high-capacity air cleaner filter may be substituted. 6-17[...]
-
Page 560
Engine Drive Belt Routing If your vehicle has the DURAMAX ® Diesel engine, see the DURAMAX ® Diesel manual for more information. V6 Engines V8 Engines 6-18[...]
-
Page 561
Maintenance Record After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2 . Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-11 can be added on the following record pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts. Maintenance Record Date Odometer Reading Serviced By Maintenance I or Maintenance II Services Performed 6-19[...]
-
Page 562
Maintenance Record (cont’d) Date Odometer Reading Serviced By Maintenance I or Maintenance II Services Performed 6-20[...]
-
Page 563
Maintenance Record (cont’d) Date Odometer Reading Serviced By Maintenance I or Maintenance II Services Performed 6-21[...]
-
Page 564
Maintenance Record (cont’d) Date Odometer Reading Serviced By Maintenance I or Maintenance II Services Performed 6-22[...]
-
Page 565
Customer Assistance and Information .............. .7-2 Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... .7-2 Online Owner Center ..................................... .7-5 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY) Users .............................................. .7-6 Customer Assistance Off ices ........................... .7-6 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ............... .7-7 Roadside Assistance Program ......................... .7-7 Scheduling Service Appointments ................... .7-10 Courtesy Transportation Program ................... .7-10 Collision Damage Repair ............................... .7-11 Reporting Safety Defects ............................... .7-14 Re[...]
-
Page 566
Customer Assistance and Information Customer Satisfaction Procedure Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns with the sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle will be resolved by the dealer’s sales or service departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction, the following steps should be taken: STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of dealership management. Normally, concerns can be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already been reviewed with the sales, service, or parts manager, con[...]
-
Page 567
STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both General Motors and your dealer are committed to making sure you are completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you can file with the Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line Program to enforce your rights. The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action, use of the p[...]
-
Page 568
STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the event that you do not feel your concerns have been addressed after following the procedure outlined in Steps 1 and 2, General Motors of Canada Limited wants you to be aware of its participation in a no-charge Mediation/Arbitration Program. General Motors of Canada Limited has committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes involving factory-related vehicle service claims. The program provides for the review of the facts involved by an impartial third party arbiter, and may include an informal hearing before the arbiter. The program is designed so that the entire dispute settlement process, from the time you file your complaint to the final decision[...]
-
Page 569
Online Owner Center Online Owner Center (U.S.) — www.gmownercenter.com/chevrolet Information and services customized for your specific vehicle — all in one convenient place. • Digital owner manual, warranty information, and more • Online service and maintenance records • Find Chevrolet dealers for service nationwide • Exclusive privileges and offers • Recall notices for your specific vehicle • OnStar ® and GM Cardmember Services Earnings summaries Other Helpful Links: Chevrolet − www.chevrolet.com Chevrolet Merchandise — www.chevymall.com Help Center — www.chevrolet.com/helpcenter • FAQ • Contact Us My GM Canada (Canada) — www.gm.ca My GM Canada is a password-p[...]
-
Page 570
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY) Users To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer Assistance Center. Any TTY user in the U.S. can communicate with Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV (2438). (TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.) Customer Assistance Of fices Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet, the letter should be addressed to: United States — Customer Assistance Chevrolet Motor Division Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center P.O. Box 33170 Detroit, MI 48232[...]
-
Page 571
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin Islands) — Customer Assistance General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V. Customer Assistance Center Paseo de la Reforma # 2740 Col. Lomas de Bezares C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F. 01-800-508-0000 Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program This program, available to qualified applicants, can reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle, such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift. The offer is available for a very limited period of time from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more details, or to determin[...]
-
Page 572
Calling for Assistance When calling Roadside Assistance, have the following information ready: • Your name, home address, and home telephone number • Telephone number of your location • Location of the vehicle • Model, year, color, and license plate number of the vehicle • Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle • Description of the problem Coverage Services are provided up to 5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km), whichever comes first. In the U.S., anyone driving the vehicle is covered. In Canada, a person driving the vehicle without permission from the owner is not covered. Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New Vehicle Limi[...]
-
Page 573
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: If your trip is interrupted due to a warranty failure, incidental expenses may be reimbursed during the 5 years/ 100,000 miles (160 000 km) Powertrain warranty period. Items considered are hotel, meals, and rental car. Services Not Included in Roadside Assistance • Impound towing caused by violation of any laws. • Legal fines. • Mounting, dismounting or changing of snow tires, chains, or other traction devices. • Towing or services for vehicles driven on a non-public road or highway. Services Specific to Canadian Purchased Vehicles • Fuel delivery: Reimbursement is approximately $5 Canadian. Diesel fuel delivery may be restricted. P[...]
-
Page 574
Scheduling Service Appointments When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact your dealer/retailer and request an appointment. By scheduling a service appointment and advising your service consultant of your transportation needs, your dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience. If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department immediately, keep driving it until it can be scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer, let them know this, and ask for instructions. If the dealer/retailer requests you to bring the vehicle for service, you are urged to do so as early in the work day as possibl[...]
-
Page 575
Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, and public transportation is used instead of the dealer’s shuttle service, the expense must be supported by original receipts and can only be up to the maximum amount allowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition, for U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by original receipts. See your dealer for information regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement of fuel or other transportation costs. Courtesy Rental Vehicle Your d[...]
-
Page 576
Collision Parts Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the same materials and construction methods as the parts with which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine GM Collision parts are your best choice to ensure that your vehicle’s designed appearance, durability, and safety are preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty. Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases, the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part, may be an acceptable choice to maintain [...]
-
Page 577
If a Crash Occurs Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash. • Check to make sure that you are all right. If you are uninjured, make sure that no one else in your vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured. • If there has been an injury, call emergency services for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until all matters have been taken care of. Move your vehicle only if its position puts you in danger or you are instructed to move it by a police off icer. • Give only the necessary and requested information to police and other parties involved in the crash. Do not discuss your personal condition, mental frame of mind, or anything unrelated to the crash. This will help guard aga[...]
-
Page 578
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair Process In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs, GM recommends that you take an active role in its repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there. Specify to the facility that any required replacement collision parts be original equipment parts, either new Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts. Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by your GM vehicle warranty. Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your insurance company may initially value the repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss this with y[...]
-
Page 579
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to: Transport Canada Road Safety Branch 2780 Sheff ield Road Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in a situation like this, please notify General Motors. Call 1-800-222-1020, or write: Chevrolet Motor Division Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center P.O. Box 33170 Detroit, MI 48232-5170 In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French), [...]
-
Page 580
Current and Past Model Order Forms Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available for current and past model GM vehicles. To request an order form, specify year and model name of the vehicle. ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123 Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time For Credit Card Orders Only (VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the World Wide Web at: helminc.com Or you can write to: Helm, Incorporated P.O. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207 Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery. Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make checks payable in U.S. funds[...]
-
Page 581
Event Data Recorders This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: • How various systems in your vehicle were operating • Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened • How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the accelerator and/or brake[...]
-
Page 582
OnStar ® If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the OnStar services, please refer to the OnStar Terms and Conditions for information on data collection and use. See also OnStar ® System on page 2-71 in this manual for more information. Navigation System If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the system may result in the storage of destinations, addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip information. Refer to the navigation system operating manual for information on stored data and for deletion instructions. Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system security, as well [...]
-
Page 583
A Accessories and Modifications ............................ 5 - 4 Accessory Power ............................................ 2-23 Accessory Power Outlets ................................. 3-22 Active Fuel Management™ ............................... 2-27 Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment ......... 4-38 Adding Equipment to Y our Airbag-Equipped V ehicle ....................................................... 1-90 Additional Required Services, Scheduled Maintenance ................................................. 6 - 7 Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5 - 7 Add-On Electrical Equipment ........................... 5-121 Adjustable Throttle and Brake P[...]
-
Page 584
Audio System ................................................. 3-85 Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................... 3-140 Navigation/Radio System, see Navigation Manual ................................................. 3-118 Setting the Clock ......................................... 3-86 XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ........... 3-142 Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-88 Audio Systems Radio Reception ........................................ 3-141 Rear Seat (RSA) ....................................... 3-138 Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................... 3-140 Automatic Headlamp System ............................ 3-18 Automatic T ransmission [...]
-
Page 585
C Calibration ..................................................... 3-63 California Perchlorate Materials Requirements ................. 5 - 5 California Fuel .................................................. 5 - 7 California Proposition 65 W arning ....................... 5 - 5 Camera, Rear Vision ....................................... 2-65 Canadian Owners ............................................... ii i Capacities and Specifications .......................... 5-129 Carbon Monoxide Engine Exhaust ........................................... 2-55 T ailgate ...................................................... 2-12 Winter Driving ............................................. 4-28 Care [...]
-
Page 586
Cleaning (cont.) Interior ..................................................... 5-113 Leather .................................................... 5-115 T ires ........................................................ 5-119 Underbody Maintenance ............................. 5-120 W ashing Y our V ehicle ................................. 5-116 Weatherstrips ............................................ 5-116 Windshield and Wiper Blades ...................... 5-118 Climate Control System ........................... 3-24, 3-26 Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-33 Climate Control Systems Dual Automatic ............................................ 3-28 Clock, Setting ...[...]
-
Page 587
Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-53 DIC Operation and Displays .................. 3-53, 3-59 DIC V ehicle Customization ............................ 3-76 DIC W arnings and Messages ........................ 3-66 Driving At Night ..................................................... 4-25 Before a Long T rip ...................................... 4-26 Defensive ..................................................... 4 - 2 Drunk .......................................................... 4 - 3 Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 4-26 Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-27 In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-25 L[...]
-
Page 588
Engine (cont.) Coolant T emperature Gage ........................... 3-44 Cooling System ........................................... 5-28 Drive Belt Routing ....................................... 6-18 Exhaust ..................................................... 2-55 Fan Noise .................................................. 5-37 Fast Idle System ......................................... 2-25 O i l ............................................................. 5-15 Oil Life System ........................................... 5-18 Overheated Protection Operating Mode ........... 5-37 Overheating ................................................ 5-34 Starting ..................................[...]
-
Page 589
Fuses Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block ............. 5-124 Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................... 5-122 Instrument Panel Fuse Block ....................... 5-122 Underhood Fuse Block ............................... 5-125 Windshield Wiper ....................................... 5-122 G Gage Oil Pressure ............................................... 3-48 Speedometer .............................................. 3-35 T achometer ................................................. 3-35 V oltmeter Gage ........................................... 3-41 Gages Engine Coolant T emperature ......................... 3-44 Fuel .......................................................... 3-[...]
-
Page 590
I Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-21 Infants and Y oung Children, Restraints ............... 1-41 Inflation - T ire Pressure ................................... 5-73 Instrument Panel Brightness .................................................. 3-20 Cluster ....................................................... 3-34 Overview ............................................... 3-4, 3-6 Storage Area .............................................. 2-81 Introduction ...................................................... 6 - 2 J Jump Starting ................................................. 5-44 K Keyless Entry , Remote Operation ........................ 2 - 4 Key[...]
-
Page 591
Lights (cont.) Brake System W arning ................................. 3-42 Charging System ......................................... 3-41 Cruise Control ............................................. 3-50 Exterior Lamps ............................................ 3-16 Flash-to-Pass .............................................. 3-10 F o g L a m p .................................................. 3-50 Four-Wheel-Drive ......................................... 3-51 Highbeam On ............................................. 3-50 High/Low Beam Changer .............................. 3-10 Low Fuel W arning ....................................... 3-52 Oil Pressure .................................[...]
-
Page 592
Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals ...................... 1 - 8 Message DIC W arnings and Messages ........................ 3-66 Mirrors Automatic Dimming Rearview ........................ 2-57 Manual Rearview Mirror ................................ 2-57 Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-61 Outside Heated Mirrors ................................ 2-61 Outside Manual Mirrors ................................ 2-58 Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors .................... 2-59 Outside Power Mirrors .................................. 2-59 Outside T owing Mirrors ................................. 2-58 P a r k T i l t ..................................................... 2-60 M P 3 .[...]
-
Page 593
Outside (cont.) Power Foldaway Mirrors ............................... 2-59 Power Mirrors ............................................. 2-59 T owing Mirrors ............................................ 2-58 Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode .......................................... 5-37 Owner Checks and Services ............................. 6-11 Owners, Canadian .............................................. i i i P Paint, Damage .............................................. 5-120 Park Shifting Into ................................................ 2-52 Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-54 Park Aid .....................................................[...]
-
Page 594
R Radio Frequency Identification (RFID), Privacy .... 7-18 Radio(s) ........................................................ 3-88 Radios Navigation/Radio System, see Navigation Manual ................................................. 3-118 Reception ................................................. 3-141 Setting the Clock ......................................... 3-86 Theft-Deterrent .......................................... 3-140 Rainsense™ II Wipers ..................................... 3-11 Reading Lamps .............................................. 3-21 Rear Axle ...................................................... 5-49 Locking .....................................................[...]
-
Page 595
S Safety Belt Reminders ..................................... 3-36 Safety Belts C a r e o f .................................................... 5-116 Extender .................................................... 1-37 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-21 Lap Belt ..................................................... 1-36 Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................................ 1-30 Safety Belts Are for Everyone ....................... 1-16 Use During Pregnancy ................................. 1-36 Safety Defects Reporting to Canadian Government ................ 7-15 Reporting to General Motors ......................... 7-15 Reporting to the U.S. Government .............[...]
-
Page 596
Snow Plow .................................................... 4-38 Spare Tire .................................................... 5-112 Installing .................................................... 5-98 Removing ................................................... 5-93 Storing ..................................................... 5-108 Specifications and Capacities .......................... 5-129 Speedometer .................................................. 3-35 StabiliT rak ® Indicator Light ............................... 3-44 StabiliT rak ® System .......................................... 4 - 6 Start V ehicle, Remote ....................................... 2 - 7 Starting the Engi[...]
-
Page 597
Tires (cont.) Cleaning ................................................... 5-119 Different Size .............................................. 5-86 Dual T ire Operation ..................................... 5-75 High-Speed Operation .................................. 5-74 If a T ire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-91 Inflation - T ire Pressure ................................ 5-73 Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-80 Installing the Spare T ire ................................ 5-98 Pressure Monitor Operation ........................... 5-77 Pressure Monitor System .............................. 5-75 Removing the Flat T ire ........................[...]
-
Page 598
V ehicle Customization, DIC .............................. 3-76 V ehicle Data Recording and Privacy .................. 7-16 V ehicle Data Recording, Radio Frequency (RFID) ........................................ 7-18 V ehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............................................ 5-121 Service Parts Identification Label .................. 5-121 V ehicle, Remote Start ....................................... 2 - 7 V entilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-33 Visors ........................................................... 2-17 V oltmeter Gage .............................................. 3-41 W W arning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ..............[...]